User’s Guide
™
Formula One for Java
®
Powerful spreadsheet application for end users.
Robust development tool for Java developers and Webmasters.
Version 7.0
Tidestone Technologies, Inc.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice. Companies, names, and data used in
examples herein are fictitious unless otherwise noted. No part of this document may be reproduced or
transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose, without the express
written permission of Tidestone Technologies, Inc.
This program is not fault-tolerant and is not designed, manufactured or intended for use or resale in the online control of nuclear facilities, aircraft navigation or communication system, air traffic control, direct life
support machines or weapons systems in which the failure of the Program could lead directly to death,
personal injury or severe physical or environmental damage.
 1999 Tidestone Technologies, Inc. All rights reserved.
Formula One is a registered trademark and Tidestone Technologies, First Impression, and VisualSpeller are
trademarks of Tidestone Technologies, Inc.
Java, 100% Pure Java, and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries.
Microsoft, MS, MS-DOS, and Windows are registered trademarks and Microsoft Access and Microsoft
Excel are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the USA and other countries.
TrueType is a registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.
Visual Cafe for Java is a registered trademark of Symantec Corporation.
JBuilder is a registered trademark of Inprise Corp.
All other product names are trademarks of their respective companies.
The Tidestone License Agreement, included with the product, specifies the permitted and prohibited uses of
the product. Any unauthorized reproduction or use of the product, or breach of the terms and conditions of
the License Agreement, is forbidden. The Tidestone License Agreement sets forth the only warranties
applicable to the product and documentation. All warranty disclaimers and exclusions set forth therein
apply to the information contained in this document.
Published by
Tidestone Technologies, Inc.
12980 Metcalf Avenue, Suite 300
Overland Park, Kansas 66213
phone 913-851-2200
toll-free 1-800-884-8665
fax 913-851-1390
www.tidestone.com
www.f1j.com
Printed in the United States of America
99/700.8
iii
Contents
Preface
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Documentation Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
New and Enhanced Features in Version 7.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xiii
xiii
xiv
xiv
xv
Part I
Installation Guide
Chapter 1
Installing Formula One for Java . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Obtaining Formula One for Java . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Licensing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Formula One for Java Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before You Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Platforms and Development Environments Tested . . . . . . . . .
System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing Formula One for Java . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Part II
The Workbook Designer
Chapter 2
Introducing the Workbook Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
The Workbook Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Understanding Workbooks, Worksheets, and Views . . . . . . . . . 10
Running the Workbook Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Using the Workbook Designer Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Edit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
View Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Insert Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Format Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Tools Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Window Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
3
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
iv
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
Using the Workbook Designer Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drawing and Forms Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Formatting Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying Parts of the Workbook Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Up the Color Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17
17
18
19
21
22
22
Chapter 3
Workbook Fundamentals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manipulating Workbooks and Worksheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Worksheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inserting Worksheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Appending Worksheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inserting Multiple Worksheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Naming Worksheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Index List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Working with Multiple Selected Worksheets . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying Items on Worksheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controlling Worksheet Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting Worksheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Items in Worksheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Active Cell and Ranges of Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Cells with the Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Navigating and Selecting Cells Using the Keyboard . . . . . .
Selecting Rows and Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Row and Column Headings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Graphical Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering and Changing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving Workbooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening and Saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Mouse with Worksheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25
26
26
27
28
28
29
29
30
30
31
33
34
34
34
35
35
36
36
36
37
37
38
Chapter 4
Working With Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Types of Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Enter Constant Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Numbers as Constant Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dates and Times as Constant Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Text as Constant Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Logical and Error Values as Constant Values . . . . . . . . . . . .
41
42
42
43
43
43
44
Contents
Chapter 5
v
How to Enter Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Numbers in Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Text in Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Logical Values in Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operators in Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing Formula Evaluation Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ways to Enter Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Formula Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Edit Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering Multi-Line Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Understanding Cell References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering Cell References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Absolute and Relative References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Relative and Absolute References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
References to Other Worksheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
References to Other Workbooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Autofill Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating Autofill Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Validating Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Validation Formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Identifying Formulas on Worksheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Type Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Locking Cells and Hiding Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calculating Worksheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Automatic Recalculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Solving Circular References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Calculation Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Understanding Worksheet Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
44
44
45
45
46
47
47
48
48
48
49
49
50
50
51
52
53
54
54
55
56
57
57
57
58
58
60
60
61
61
62
Formatting Worksheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About Number Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Built-in Number Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating Custom Number Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Formatting Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aligning Cell Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
63
64
64
67
72
73
vi
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
Changing Row Height and Column Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Default Row Height and Column Width . . . . . . . . . .
Sizing Rows and Columns Using Menu Commands . . . . . . .
Sizing Rows and Columns Using Click and Drag . . . . . . . . .
Freezing Panes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Applying Colors to Worksheets and Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Worksheet Background Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Cell Fill Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Cell Borders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Formatting Row and Column Headings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sizing Row and Column Headings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Row and Column Heading Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copying Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Formatting to Maximize Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
73
73
74
76
77
78
78
79
80
81
81
82
83
84
Chapter 6
Editing Worksheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Moving, Copying, and Pasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Dragging to Move, Copy, and Paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using The Toolbar to Move, Copy, and Paste . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Menu Commands to Move, Copy, and Paste . . . . . . .
Finding and Replacing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inserting Cells, Rows, and Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clearing and Deleting Cells, Rows, and Columns . . . . . . . . . .
Sorting Data in Worksheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
85
86
86
88
89
90
93
93
94
Chapter 7
Working With Graphical Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating Graphical Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating Polygons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Graphical Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying Graphical Object Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying Line Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying Arrow Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying Fill Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying Dropdown List Box Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying Check Box Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying Button Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying Polygon Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying Picture Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
97
98
98
99
99
100
101
102
102
104
106
107
107
Contents
vii
Identifying and Naming Graphical Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Identifying Graphical Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Naming Graphical Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Moving, Sizing, and Arranging Graphical Objects . . . . . . . . .
Moving Graphical Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sizing Graphical Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Arranging Graphical Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting Graphical Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Graphical Objects and Microsoft Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
108
108
109
109
109
110
110
111
111
Chapter 8
Printing Worksheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing Worksheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of Worksheet Print Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying Print Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying Print Titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying Page Breaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying Page Print Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying Sheet Print Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying Margin Print Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying Headers and Footers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Formatting Codes for Headers and Footers . . . . . . . . . . . . .
113
114
114
116
116
117
118
119
120
121
121
Part III
Charting
Chapter 9
Getting Started With Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the Chart Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List of Chart Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About Chart Titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding or Editing a Chart Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aligning Chart Title Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other Title Formatting Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About Chart Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding or Moving a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sizing a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the Legend Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other Legend Formatting Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resizing and Moving a Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
125
126
126
127
129
129
130
130
131
131
132
132
132
132
viii
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
Printing a Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting a Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
133
133
Chapter 10
Chart Concepts and Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chart Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Chart Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Moving Chart Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sizing Chart Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Context Menu to Edit Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Effect of Selection on the Context Menu . . . . . . . . . . .
Problems With Clicking for the Context Menu . . . . . . . . . .
Charting Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Working With Chart Data Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Anatomy of a Data Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing Cells in the Data Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headings in the Data Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Series and Categories in the Data Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How Each Chart Type Displays Series and Categories . . . .
Resetting Chart Formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
135
136
138
141
141
142
142
142
143
145
145
146
147
147
149
149
Chapter 11
Guide to Individual Chart Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About Area Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Notes About Area Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About Bubble Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating Bubble Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sizing All the Bubbles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Labeling Bubbles by Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Notes About Bubble Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About Column and Bar Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Bar Spacing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Showing Bars as Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About Combination Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating Combination Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Notes About Combination Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About Doughnut Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sizing the Doughnut’s Hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the Start Angle of the Slices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exploding the Slices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Notes About Doughnut Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
151
152
152
153
153
155
156
156
158
158
160
160
161
162
163
163
164
164
165
Contents
ix
About Line Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding High-Low Lines to Line Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Drop Lines to Line Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Open-Close Bars to Line Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Notes About Line Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About Pie Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the Sizes of the Pies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the Start Angle of the Slices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exploding the Slices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Notes About Pie Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About Step Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Notes About Step Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About Stock Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Types of Stock Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating High-Low Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating Open-High-Low-Close Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating Volume Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About XY (Scatter) Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating XY Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Notes About XY Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
166
166
166
167
168
169
169
170
170
171
171
171
172
173
173
174
174
175
176
177
Chapter 12
Data Display in Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About Data Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing Chart Series Into Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the Chart’s Data Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the Entire Chart’s Data Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing Chart’s Data Source for Series and Headings . . .
Changing the Order of Chart Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stacking Series of Data Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Notes About Stacking Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plotting Data Points as Percentages of the Category . . . . . . .
Special Notes About Plotting Series as Percentages . . . . . .
179
180
180
181
182
183
184
186
187
188
188
190
Chapter 13
Axes in Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About Category and Value Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About Axis Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Value Axis Scale Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing Axis Scale Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hiding an Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
191
192
193
193
194
196
x
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
About Axis Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing Axis Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying Axis Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About Ticks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About Grid Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Showing and Hiding Grid Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About Grid Line Colors and Line Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About Axis Intersection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Axis Intersection’s Effect on Axis Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reversing the Order of Categories or Values . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About Logarithmic Value Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About Second Y Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating Second Y Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Working With Second Y Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Number of Studies for a Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying a Series in a Study . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assigning Length Ratios to the Main Chart and Studies . . .
Hiding the X Axis for a Main Chart or Study . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing Axis Settings for the Entire Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
196
196
197
199
201
201
202
202
203
203
204
205
205
206
206
207
208
208
208
209
Chapter 14
Text and Numbers in Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing Text and Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About Axis Titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About Data Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying Data Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing Data Label Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aligning Data Label Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Repositioning Data Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying Data Label Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing Number Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Number Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing Fonts, Font Styles, and Font Colors . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Font Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Fonts for the Entire Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
211
212
213
214
214
215
216
217
218
218
219
219
220
220
Chapter 15
Colors in Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Changing Line Styles and Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
The Line Style Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Contents
Changing Fill Colors, Patterns, and Gradients . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Fill Area Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Markers tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatically Varying Data Point Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Notes About Varying Data Point Colors . . . . . . . .
xi
223
224
225
226
227
228
Glossary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Tidestone
v
P R E F A C E
Overview
Computer spreadsheets — tools that help us understand, model, and manipulate
relationships between sets of numerical data — further empower us by providing the
ability to manipulate, extrapolate, interpret, graph, and display numeric data with the
speed and convenience of the computer. Formula One for Java unites all of the
powerful utility and familiar interface of the computer spreadsheet with the speed,
power, and the universal presence of the Internet.
Designed for use in Java development environments, Formula One for Java provides
the tools you need to design, create, and distribute custom spreadsheets over the
Internet as part of your application, applet, or JavaBean. Using Formula One for Java
you may also embed high-quality spreadsheets in your Web pages with just a few
lines of HTML code.
Formula One for Java may also be used as a standalone worksheet application.
About This Manual
This manual, the Formula One for Java User’s Guide, describes how to use the
graphical user interface of Formula One for Java. The complete documentation for
Formula One for Java consists of three separate manuals:
1. Formula One for Java User’s Guide
A basic guide to using electronic spreadsheets in general and using Formula One
for Java on a desktop or over a network as an end user.
2. Formula One for Java Technical Guide
An outline of technical specifications and procedures for developers who want to
include Formula One for Java in their applications, applets, or JavaBeans. The
Technical Guide includes more advanced concepts and uses, such as attaching
workbooks and views using Java.
3. Formula One for Java Function Reference
A complete reference of the 325 functions available for use within Formula One
for Java.
vi
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
Using This Manual
To effectively use this manual, you should be familiar with the basic operational
features and interface characteristics of your operating system and with the basic
concepts and applications of Java. If you have never used Java before, we suggest
that you read related Java documentation before continuing.
For the most part, this manual assumes you are using a Windows operating
environment. Keyboard keys and some graphical user interface elements might vary
depending upon your operating environment.
This document along with other useful information about Formula One for Java is
also available online at www.tidestone.com.
Documentation Conventions
Throughout this documentation, typographic conventions are used to define
elements and references to Formula One for Java items. Recognizing these
conventions will help you understand and use the documentation.
Convention example
Description
➤
To install Formula One for Java:
A series of numbered instructions is
preceded by an introductory line. The
introductory line begins with an arrowhead.
1. Select the cells you want to format.
Numbered instructions provide step-by-step
directions for performing tasks. Perform the
instructions in the order they are presented.
workbook
In general sections, italic text is used for the
first occurrence of a new term.
fontname
In reference sections, italic text indicates
variable or argument information you must
supply.
=B1+C3
Letter Gothic font is used for examples of
cell entries.
F1J7Swing.jar
File names are presented in bold type.
Format > Sheet > Properties
Choose the Properties option on the Sheet
submenu of the Format menu.
CTRL + L
Type L while holding down the CTRL key.
Preface
vii
New and Enhanced Features in Version 7.0
New Features
Java 2 support. Formula One for Java includes support for Java™ 2 SDK v 1.2
(J2SDK).
Swing. Formula One 7.0 includes support for Java’s Swing user interface classes.
Java 2D support. Formula One for Java 7.0 takes advantage of the Java 2D classes of
the Java 2 JDK, enabling users and developers to draw lines of varying weights and
styles, use different patterns and gradients for background fills, rotate text,
superimpose graphics, and leverage more printing options.
Model/View/Controller architecture. Formula One 7.0 includes a new API that enables
developers to unbundle the model (workbook) from the view (GUI).
2D charting. Formula One for Java includes 2D charting for use in conjunction with
Formula One spreadsheets to graphically display spreadsheet data. The charts offer
Excel compatibility and include column, bar, high-low (or stack type), line, pie, area,
step, combination, XY (scatter), bubble, doughnut, and “Studies,” a chart type that
enables multiple sets of data to share the same category axis, but plot on separate
value axes.
Multiple undos and redos. Formula One for Java’s standalone application enables
users to perform multiple (up to 100) undos and redos through the keyboard or a
mouse and pull-down menu command.
InfoBus. Formula One for Java plugs into the InfoBus architecture enabling it to
share data with other software that supports InfoBus.
Pluggable recalculation engine. Formula One for Java allows developers to replace
the standard Formula One for Java calculation engine with optional specialized
recalculation engines. Each specialized recalculation engine’s performance is tailored
to a different type of application and carries different size footprints and capabilities,
allowing users and developers to determine which engine works best for their
application.
Add-in worksheet functions. Developers have the ability to write custom functions
for use in Formula One for Java worksheets.
Thread pooling. In Formula One for Java, groups are now independent of threads,
allowing for more efficient resource sharing among groups.
Modular JAR files. Formula One for Java offers a pre-determined set of JAR files.
This way, developers and web builders only need to deploy the Formula One for Java
JAR files utilized in an application, significantly reducing download times.
viii
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
Enhanced Features
Read/Write Excel Files. Formula One for Java 7.0 adds support for Excel 97 and
Excel 2000 formats and retains the ability to create, import, and export Excel version
5 and 7 files.
More functions. Formula One for Java provides 325 of Excel’s 329 functions. This
feature is aided by 7.0’s added support of array formulas, which output multiple
numbers to a range of cells. The added functions, including many new statistical
analysis, engineering, and financial operations, were created to appeal to specialized
end users such as accountants and engineers.
Extended date range. Formula One for Java supports dates through December 31,
9999.
Enlarged workbook capacity. Formula One for Java now supports more than a billion
rows and 32,768 columns per worksheet. Workbooks may have up to 32,768 sheets.
Performance. Formula One for Java’s enhanced performance matches or exceeds the
power of traditional desktop spreadsheet applications. Enhanced performance is most
apparent in the functionality of its completely rewritten calculation engine, cell-tocell copying, reading and writing spreadsheets, and printing features.
1
P A R T
1
Installation Guide
Tidestone
3
C H A P T E R
1
Installing Formula One for Java
This chapter provides information about obtaining, preparing to install, licensing and
installing Formula One for Java. This chapter also demonstrates how to change class
path settings on your system to recognize the software and run applications.
This chapter covers the following topics:
■
“Obtaining Formula One for Java” on page 4
■
“Before You Install . . .” on page 5
■
“Installing Formula One for Java” on page 5
4
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
Obtaining Formula One for Java
You can obtain Formula One for Java by purchasing the CD software and
documentation package or by downloading the software over the Internet from the
Tidestone Technologies website at www.tidestone.com. You can also find licensing,
pricing, technical support, and other information about Formula One for Java at this
site.
Licensing Requirements
Though you can license Formula One for Java for use on a single computer (as a user
or developer), how Formula One for Java is licensed is usually based on how an
application that contains Formula One for Java is deployed after development.
Additional licensing information is available online at the Tidestone Technologies
website at www.tidestone.com, by e-mail [email protected], or by calling the
Tidestone sales department at (800) 884-8665.
Formula One for Java Files
The CD package and the Internet download packet include the following basic set of
files. The Formula One for Java installer copies these files to your system.
File
Description
F1J7Swing.jar
Formula One for Java classes stored in a compressed JAR format.
F1JSplit.class
Class file required to separate F1J7Swing.jar into its component
JAR files.
Servlets/Directory
Includes F1JwriteURL.class, write servlet source, and readme
files required to use the writeURL method.
usersguide.pdf
User’s Guide in PDF format
techguide.pdf
Technical Guide in PDF format
functionref.pdf
Function Reference in PDF format
jh.jar
Java Help JAR file. Contains the JavaHelp system.
F1Help.jar
Formula One for Java documentation in JavaHelp format.
API Help/Directory
API Help in HTML format. Directory of HTML files that comprise
the API documentation generated by the Javadoc tool.
The PDF files for the User’s Guide, Function Reference, and Technical Guide and API
Guide files are also available for download from www.tidestone.com.
Chapter 1 Installing Formula One for Java
5
Before You Install . . .
Platforms and Development Environments Tested
Formula One for Java has been extensively tested and is known to run reliably in
Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows NT 4.0, and Solaris 2.6
System Requirements
To run Formula One for Java, you must have the appropriate Java SDK installed on
your system.
When installing Formula One for Java, if you want the Designer Help to be available
from the Workbook Designer Help menu, you must install JavaHelp classes either by
including them in your Class Path settings or by including the jh.jar and F1Help.jar
files in the command line when running from the command prompt.
Installing Formula One for Java
For Windows 95, 98, and NT, the installation program and associated files are
contained in a self-extracting executable program. For other platforms, the installation
program and files are contained in a JAR file that you must uncompress before
installing the software.
➤ To install Formula One for Java in Windows 95/98/NT:
1. Locate the file F1J7Setup.exe on the CD or from the files you downloaded and
double-click on the file to run the installer.
2. Read and follow the instructions that appear in the installation program windows
to identify the components you want to install, and select a directory and folder to
hold the program files.
The installation program creates a folder named F1Java containing all the program
files and subdirectories. After installation, you can access the Designer, ReadMe file,
and Uninstall program by choosing Start > Programs > Formula One.
➤ To install Formula One for Java on all other platforms:
1. Open a command prompt.
2. Change to the directory containing the f1jsetup.jar file.
3. Execute the following command to uncompress the JAR file:
jar -xf f1jsetup.jar
4. Execute the following command to install Formula One for Java:
jre -cp f1jsetup
5. Follow the instructions in the installation wizard to complete the installation
process.
Tidestone
7
P A R T
2
The Workbook Designer
Tidestone
9
C H A P T E R
2
Introducing the Workbook Designer
The Workbook Designer is Formula One for Java’s graphical user interface. It is the
tool that allows users to create worksheets, enter data and formulas on them, format
them, and print them.
This chapter covers the following topics that give you basic information about the
Workbook Designer.
■
“The Workbook Designer” on page 10
■
“Understanding Workbooks, Worksheets, and Views” on page 10
■
“Running the Workbook Designer” on page 11
■
“Using the Workbook Designer Menus” on page 12
■
“Using the Workbook Designer Toolbars” on page 17
This chapter also covers the following advanced topics that give more detailed
information about using the Workbook Designer.
■
“Displaying Parts of the Workbook Designer” on page 21
■
“Setting Up the Color Palette” on page 22
■
“Setting Preferences” on page 22
10
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
The Workbook Designer
The Workbook Designer, shown in the following illustration, appears and behaves
much like a commercial spreadsheet application. It is useful in different ways: you can
use it when you are designing an application or you can launch it from your
application during run time. You can also create Formula One for Java worksheets
using the standalone version.
Standard toolbar
Drawing and Forms toolbar
Formula bar
Menu bar
Formatting toolbar
Worksheet
Understanding Workbooks, Worksheets, and Views
When you open or create a file in Formula One for Java, you also open or create a
workbook. Workbooks store data, formulas, workbook formatting information, and
workbook-specific information such as printing and calculation attributes. You can
open multiple workbooks simultaneously. Formulas in one workbook can refer to cells
in other workbooks.
A workbook is a collection of individual worksheets. Worksheets allow you to show
and analyze data. You can manipulate data on several worksheets simultaneously and
base calculations on data from multiple worksheets stored within the same workbook.
You use worksheets to separate information into groups based on how you want to use
the information stored in the workbook. Say you have a database that includes yearend sales figures. You want to break down the figures into quarterly time periods to
present to your manager. You could do one of three things:
Chapter 2 Introducing the Workbook Designer
11
1.Keep all the figures on the same worksheet with the database;
2.Create a new workbook for each quarter; or
3.Create a new worksheet for each quarter within the same workbook.
Unless your database is very simple and small, keeping the figures in one worksheet
creates a large, cumbersome worksheet, making it difficult to display or distribute the
data. Splitting the data into separate workbooks takes up more memory and makes
data access less convenient. Storing the data in the same workbook separated into four
worksheets plus the master database makes the most sense — data is more easily
displayed and distributed, takes up less memory, and is more easily accessed.
Running the Workbook Designer
You can launch the Workbook Designer using a GUI or the command prompt.
➤ To run the Workbook Designer in Windows 95/98/NT:
■
Locate and double-click on the F1J7.exe file.
or
■
Click Start > Programs > Formula One for Java > Formula One for Java.
or
■
Follow the directions under Any Platform, below.
➤ To run the Workbook Designer on Solaris Machines:
A shell script is included with the installer, which launches the Workbook Designer.
1. At the command prompt, switch to the installation directory.
2. Execute the following command:
./f1j7
➤ To run the Workbook Designer on any platform from a command prompt:
1. Switch to the directory that contains Formula One for Java 7.
2. Execute the following command:
java -classpath c:\F1J7Swing.jar com.f1j.swing.designer.Designer
or
3. Execute the following command to include the JavaHelp documentation:
java -classpath c:\F1J7Swing.jar;jh.jar;F1help.jar
com.f1j.swing.designer.Designer
Note The Any Platform from a Command Prompt instructions assume that a
supported Java Virtual Machine (JVM) is installed.
12
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
Using the Workbook Designer Menus
The following tables highlight the commands available on the Workbook Designer
menu bar and provide a brief description of each command.
File Menu
Command
Description
New
Creates a new workbook file.
Open
Opens a workbook file from disk. You can open files saved
in Formula One 3.x and newer format (.VTS files), Excel
format (.XLS file), and tabbed text (.TXT).
Close
Closes the current workbook file. Prompts you to save any
unsaved changes.
Save
Save As
Saves the current workbook. Workbook Files can be saved in
Formula One formats 3.x, 4.x, 5.x, 6.x, 7.x (.VTS files),
Excel Versions 5, 7, Excel 97, Excel 2000 formats (.XLS
files), tabbed text, or values-only tabbed text (.TXT).
Page Setup
Displays the Page Setup dialog box. This dialog box allows
you to define header and footer text, page margins, page
print order, page orientation and size, page centering, page
numbering, worksheet-related print options, and scale.
Print Area > Set Print Area
Defines the currently selected range in the active worksheet
as the Print_Area user-defined name.
Print Area >Clear Print Area
Cancels the above action.
Print Titles > Set Print Titles
Defines the currently selected range in the active worksheet
as the Print_Titles user-defined name.
Print Titles >Clear Print Titles
Cancels the above action.
Print
Allows you to select print options and print the active
worksheet.
Exit
Exits the Workbook Designer.
Edit Menu
Command
Description
Undo
Nullifies the last action performed with the mouse or keyboard in
Formula One for Java. (up to 100 undos).
Redo
Re-performs the nullified action (up to 100 redos).
Cut
Removes the selected object or the contents of the selected cells and
places it on the clipboard.
Copy
Copies the selected object or the contents of the selected cells to the
clipboard.
Paste
Pastes the contents of the clipboard into the selected cells.
Chapter 2 Introducing the Workbook Designer
13
Command
Description
Paste Special
Pastes the formats, values, or formulas of copied cells into the selected
cells. In addition, Paste Special controls how data copied from a
different application is pasted.
Copy Cell Format
Copies the current cell’s formatting and applies the formatting to the
next cell or range of cells selected.
Polygon Points
Toggles between normal polygon editing and polygon point editing.
Select All Objects
Selects all of the graphical objects on the active worksheet.
Sort
Displays the Sort dialog box. This dialog box allows you to set the
sorting method and sort keys for data sorting.
Fill > Down
Places a copy of the data from the cells in the top row of the selected
range into every cell below in the selected range. Existing data in the
selected cells is replaced with the new data.
Fill > Right
Places a copy of the data in the cells in the leftmost column of the
selected range into every cell to the right in the selected range. Existing
data in the selected cells is replaced with the new data.
Clear > All
Clears formats and values from the selected cells.
Clear > Formats
Clears cell formats from the selected cells; leaves the data intact.
Clear > Contents
Clears values from the selected cells; leaves the formatting intact.
Delete > Options
Deletes the selected cells or objects. Options allow you to designate
which cells adjacent to the deleted cells are shifted to fill the space left
by the vacated cells and to choose to delete an entire row or column of
cells.
Delete Sheet
Removes the selected worksheets.
Find
Searches in selected cells or the active worksheet for the characters you
specify and selects the first cell that contains those characters. If only
one cell is selected, searches the entire worksheet.
Replace
Searches in selected cells or the active worksheet for the characters you
specify and replaces them with your specified replacement characters. If
only one cell is selected, searches the entire worksheet.
Goto
Displays the Goto dialog box, which allows you to specify a cell to
display in the worksheet window. The specified cell is then made the
active cell.
Preferences
Displays the Preferences dialog box where you may choose a Look and
Feel and set the number of undos.
View Menu
Command
Description
Formula Bar
Toggles the display of the Formula Bar.
Toolbars > Standard
Toggles the display of the Main Toolbar.
14
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
Command
Description
Toolbars > Formatting
Toggles the display of the Formatting Toolbar.
Toolbars > Drawing and Forms
Toggles the display of the Drawing and Forms Toolbar.
Zoom > Percentage
Magnifies or shrinks the current view to the percentage
indicated.
Insert Menu
Command
Description
Cells
Inserts cells at the location of the current selection. Options
allow you to choose which cells adjacent to the insertion are
shifted to make room for the new cells and to choose to
insert entire rows or columns of cells.
Rows
Inserts a new row above the selected cell or row. You can
insert multiple rows by highlighting the number of rows you
want to insert prior to executing this command.
Columns
Inserts a new column to the left of the selected cell or
column. You can insert multiple Columns by highlighting the
number of columns you want to insert prior to executing this
command.
Worksheet
Inserts a new worksheet before the active worksheet and
makes the new worksheet the active one. If more than one
worksheet is selected, this command inserts the same
number of worksheets as the number selected. This
command fails if non-contiguous sheets are selected.
You can also insert a new worksheet after the current
worksheet while keeping the current worksheet active by
pressing the Control key and clicking Insert > Worksheet.
Page Break
Places a horizontal page break adjacent to the top edge of the
active cell and a vertical page break adjacent to the left edge
of the active cell. If a row or column is selected, a page break
is placed above the selected row or to the left of the selected
column.
Name
Displays the Defined Name dialog box, which allows you to
replace cell and range references with user-defined cell
names. You can also name constants and formulas.
Chart
Allows you to insert a chart that plots the data in the selected
cells.
Picture
Allows you to draw a frame into which you may later insert
a picture file.
Drawing Object > Arc
Selects the Arc tool which allows you to draw arcs.
Drawing Object > Line
Selects the Line tool which allows you to draw lines.
Drawing Object > Oval
Selects the Oval tool which allows you to draw ovals.
Drawing Object > Polygon
Selects the Polygon tool which allows you to draw polygons.
Chapter 2 Introducing the Workbook Designer
15
Command
Description
Drawing Object > Rectangle
Selects the Rectangle tool which allows you to draw
rectangles.
Forms Object > Button
Selects the Button tool which allows you to draw buttons.
Forms Object > Checkbox
Selects the Check Box tool which allows you to draw check
boxes.
Forms Object > Dropdown
Listbox
Selects the Drop Down List Box tool which allows you to
draw drop-down list boxes.
Cancel Insert Object
Allows you to deselect a graphical object tool.
Command
Description
Cells
Displays the Format Cells dialog box, which allows you to set
cell formatting such as numeric display, alignment, fonts,
borders, fill patterns, protection, and validation.
Row > Height
Displays the Row Height dialog box, which allows you to set
the height of the selected rows, specify default row heights,
and specify automatic row height.
Row > Hide
Hides the selected rows. This does not delete them from the
worksheet.
Row > Unhide
Shows the hidden rows in a selection.
Row > Default Height
Displays the Default Row Height dialog box which allows you
to define a default height for rows.
Column > Width
Displays the Column Width dialog box, which allows you to
set the width of the selected columns, specify default column
widths, and specify automatic column width.
Column > Autofit Selection
Adjusts the width of the column to accommodate the size of
the longest text string or value in the selected cell or range.
Column > Hide
Hides the selected columns. This does not delete them from
the worksheet.
Column > Unhide
Shows the hidden columns in a selection.
Column > Default Width
Displays the Default Column Width dialog box, which allows
you to define a default width of columns.
Sheet > Properties
Displays the Format Sheet dialog box, which allows you to set
viewing, editing, selection, color, and other properties for the
active worksheet.
Sheet > Enable Protection
Enables protection for protected cells in the worksheet. A
check next to this command means that protection is enabled.
Select the command again to disable protection.
Freeze Panes
Freezes or unfreezes the rows above the top selected row and
the columns left of the leftmost selected column. Frozen
columns and rows do not scroll and cannot be edited. Choose
this command again to unfreeze the cells.
Format Menu
16
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
Command
Description
Default Font
Displays the Default Font dialog box, which allows you to set
the default font and the font size used to display data in
worksheets. The default font affects the widths of worksheet
columns and heights of worksheet rows.
Object
Displays the Format Object dialog box, which displays the
appropriate tabbed pages for the selected object.
Bring to Front
Places the selected object(s) in front of other objects in the
worksheet.
Send to Back
Places the selected object(s) behind other objects in the
worksheet.
Tools Menu
Command
Description
Recalc
Recalculates all open cells, worksheets, and workbooks.
Options
Displays the Options dialog box, which allows you to set general, calculation,
and color options.
Window Menu
Command
Description
New Window
Opens another view of the currently active workbook. All changes made
in either view display in both views.
Cascade
Arranges all of the open workbooks in a cascade from the upper left to
the lower right in the order opened, with the lower right workbook active.
Tile
Arranges all of the open workbooks into equally sized windows within
the Workbook Designer (like floor tiles) with the lower right workbook
active.
Tile Vertical
Arranges all of the open workbooks into equally sized side-by-side
windows within the Workbook Designer, with the far right workbook
active.
Tile Horizontal
Arranges all of the open workbooks into equally sized stacked windows
within the Workbook Designer with the bottom workbook active.
[workbook name]
The names of all the open workbooks are listed as menu options. Clicking
a workbook makes it active.
Windows...
Opens the Windows dialog, which lists all the open workbooks. Select a
workbook and click Activate to make it active, or click Close to close it.
Chapter 2 Introducing the Workbook Designer
17
Help Menu
Command
Description
Contents and Index
Displays Formula One for Java Designer Help.
About Formula One for Java
Displays the About Formula One for Java dialog box which
includes the version number, copyright, and other legal
information.
Using the Workbook Designer Toolbars
Formula One for Java has three toolbars: Standard, Drawing and Forms, and
Formatting. You can display or hide the toolbars by toggling options in the View >
Toolbars menu. The toolbar buttons described in the following tables provide easy
access to some of the most common Formula One for Java menu commands.
Standard Toolbar
Use the buttons on the Standard Toolbar to perform basic workbook functions such as
opening, saving, and printing workbooks.
Button
Name
Description
New button
Creates a new workbook file.
Open button
Opens an existing workbook file from disk.
Save button
Opens the save dialog.
Print button
Opens the print dialog.
Find button
Opens the find dialog.
Cut button
Cuts a selection to the clipboard.
Copy button
Copies a selection to the clipboard.
Paste button
Pastes items and data from the clipboard into the
selected cells.
Copy Format button
Copies the format of the selected cells.
18
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
Button
Name
Description
Undo button
Nullifies last action (up to 100 undos).
Redo button
Re-performs the nullified action (up to 100 redos).
Ascending Sort button
Sorts a one-column range from lowest to highest
value. Places text in alphabetical order. Places
numbers before text. For multi-column ranges, sorts
the leftmost column in the same way while keeping
row data intact.
Descending Sort button
Sorts a one-column range from highest to lowest
value. Places text in reverse alphabetical order.
Places text before numbers. For multi-column
ranges, sorts the leftmost column in the same way
while keeping row data intact
Drawing and Forms button
Toggles the display of the Drawing and Forms
Toolbar.
Help button
Opens Formula One for Java Designer help.
Drawing and Forms Toolbar
Use the buttons on the Drawing and Forms Toolbar to create graphical objects and
interactive objects for forms.
Button
Name
Description
Insert Chart button
Draws a chart in the area you designate based
on the selected cells.
Insert Picture button
Inserts a picture object in the area you
designate.
Arc button
Draws arcs.
Line button
Draws lines.
Oval button
Draws ovals and circles.
Chapter 2 Introducing the Workbook Designer
Button
Name
Description
Polygon button
Draws polygons.
Rectangle button
Draws rectangles and squares.
Button button
Draws push buttons.
Check Box button
Draws check boxes.
List Box button
Draws drop down list boxes.
Polygon Point Editing button
Toggles between normal polygon editing and
polygon point editing.
19
Formatting Toolbar
Use the buttons on the Formatting Toolbar to quickly and easily format selected
worksheet data.
Note The Formatting Toolbar also provides two drop down lists that allow you to
select and change fonts and font sizes.
Button
Name
Description
Bold button
Changes the formatting of the contents of the selected
cells based on the status of the reference cell (the first cell
you click on when selecting a range of cells). If the
reference cell is bold, clicking the bold button unbolds the
contents of the selected cells. If the reference cell is not
bold, the bold button bolds the contents of the selected
cells.
Italic button
Changes the formatting of the contents of the selected
cells based on the status of the reference cell (the first cell
you click on when selecting a range of cells.) If the
reference cell contents are italicized, clicking the italic
button removes the italics from the contents of the selected
cells. If the reference cell contents are not italicized, the
italic button italicizes the contents of the selected cells.
20
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
Button
Name
Description
Underline button
Changes the formatting of the contents of the selected
cells based on the status of the reference cell (the first cell
you click on when selecting a range of cells.) If the
reference cell contents are underlined, clicking the
underline button removes the underlining of the contents
of the selected cells. If the refence cell contents are not
underlined, the underline button underlines the contents of
the selected cells.
Font Color button
Displays the color palette so you can select a font color for
the selected range of cells.
Fill Color button
Displays the color palette so you can select a background
color for the selected range of cells.
Left Align button
Left aligns the contents of the selected range of cells.
Center Align button
Centers the contents of the selected range of cells.
Right Align button
Right aligns the contents of the selected range of cells.
Center Across button
Displays the data in the rightmost cell that contains data
centered over the area of the remaining selected cells to
the right in the same row.
Common Fixed and
Displays a list of common fixed and general data formats
General Formats button to apply to the selected cells.
Currency button
Displays a list of common currency formats to apply to the
selected cells.
Percentage Format button
Displays a list of common percentage formats to apply to
the selected cells.
Fraction Format button
Displays a list of common fraction formats to apply to the
selected cells.
Date and Time Format
button
Displays a list of common date and time formats to apply
to the selected cells.
Chapter 2 Introducing the Workbook Designer
21
Displaying Parts of the Workbook Designer
Formula One for Java lets you decide how you want to display certain aspects of the
Workbook Designer. You may display or hide the Formula Bar, the cell reference in
the Formula Bar, the worksheet tabs, type markers, and the border around the
workbook. You may also move the worksheet tabs.
Note The View menu also allows you to hide and display parts of the Workbook
Designer. See “View Menu” on page 13.
➤ To change the Workbook Designer display:
1. Select Tools > Options and click the General tab, if necessary.
The General tab of the Options dialog box appears, as shown below.
2. Select a location for worksheet tabs from the drop-down menu. You can place the
tabs at the top or bottom of the worksheet or choose Off to hide them.
3. Check the Formula Bar check box to display the Formula Bar, which shows
formulas and/or values that appear in cells.
4. Check the Cell Reference in Formula Bar check box to display the cell reference
within the Formula Bar. The Cell Reference indicates which cell contains the
formula or value displayed in the Formula Bar.
5. Check the Type Markers check box to display the type markers — colored
borders around cells that indicate cell data type. A green type marker indicates
values; a red type marker indicates formulas; a blue marker indicates an empty
cell to which formatting has been applied.
6. Check the Border check box to display a border around the workbook.
7. Press Apply to apply the changes you’ve made and leave the dialog box open.
Press OK to apply the changes and close the dialog box.
22
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
Setting Up the Color Palette
When you install Formula One for Java, you get a color palette with 56 pre-set default
colors. You can use the default colors as they are, or you can change them. The palette
colors use the RGB color format, which allows you to change the appearance of the
color by increasing and decreasing the amount of red, green, and blue in the color.
➤ To change the colors on the Color Palette:
1. Select Tools > Options and click the Color Palette tab.
The Color Palette tab of the Options dialog box appears, as shown below.
Click on a color to change its settings.
Adjust the color using the slider bars or by
entering a different color value.
Click here to return all colors to their
default settings.
To return a color to its default setting,
select it, then click here.
2. Click on the color you want to change.
3. Move the slider bars for the red, green, and blue scroll bars to increase or
decrease the color values. The values can range from 0 to 255. You may also type
the number values in the text boxes.
The appearance of the selected palette color will change as you change the red,
green, and blue scroll bar values.
4. Press Apply to apply the changes to the color and leave the dialog box open. Press
OK to apply the changes and close the dialog box.
Setting Preferences
Look and Feel
In the Look and Feel options window, you may choose Metal (the default Look and
Feel, used throughout the User’s Guide), CDE (Common Desktop Environment)
Motif, or Windows as the desktop look and feel.
Chapter 2 Introducing the Workbook Designer
Preferences
The Options window allows you to set the number of undos to any value between 0
and 100. Setting the value to 0 turns Undo off, which optimizes Formula One for
Java’s speed and memory usage. The default value is 3.
Choose Look and Feel in the Edit > Preferences window
The default setting is “Metal.” Click on the desired Look and Feel
to change.
Choose Undo Limits (up to 100) in the Edit > Preferences > Other
window.
The default is 3.
Set to 0 to optimize performance and memory usage.
23
Tidestone
25
C H A P T E R
3
Workbook Fundamentals
This chapter discusses the basic concepts that you need to know in order to use the
Workbook Designer, including:
■
“Manipulating Workbooks and Worksheets” on page 26
■
“Selecting Items in Worksheets” on page 34
■
“Entering and Changing Data” on page 36
■
“Saving Workbooks” on page 37
■
“Using the Mouse with Worksheets” on page 38
26
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
Manipulating Workbooks and Worksheets
Once you create a Formula One for Java workbook, you can add, insert, delete, name,
and select the worksheets contained in your workbook. For more specific information
about working with workbooks and worksheets, refer to “Understanding Workbooks,
Worksheets, and Views” on page 10.
The following illustration shows a workbook with three worksheets.
Each worksheet’s name is displayed on
a separate tab.
Drag the splitter bar to shrink or
enlarge tab space.
Selecting Worksheets
Typically, you perform most of your work in one worksheet at a time in the active
worksheet. When you have multiple worksheets in a workbook, you can use the
mouse to click on a worksheet’s tab to make it the active worksheet. The tab is
highlighted and moves on top of the other tabs.
You can save time and effort by performing some tasks on several worksheets at once.
For example, if you want all three worksheets in your workbook to use the same data
used as column or row titles in a chart, you can select all three worksheets and enter
the titles on the active worksheet. The data for the titles is automatically entered in the
other selected worksheets as well.
➤ To select multiple worksheets in the Workbook Designer:
■
Use one of the following key/mouse combinations, depending on whether you
want to select adjacent or non-adjacent worksheets:
Action
Result
CTRL-Click on worksheet tab
Selects or deselects non-adjacent worksheets. Any other
selected worksheets remain selected.
SHIFT-Click on worksheet tab
Selects all adjacent worksheets between the active worksheet
and the worksheet you clicked on. All other worksheets are
deselected.
Chapter 3 Workbook Fundamentals
27
The following illustration shows various groupings of selected worksheets.
Sheet4 is the active worksheet. All other
worksheets are deselected.
If you hold down the Shift key and select
Sheet1, all worksheets between the active
worksheet (Sheet4) and Sheet1 are
selected.
If you select all but one worksheet, and then
make one of the selected worksheets active
by selecting it, all the other worksheets
remain selected.
If you hold down the Control key and select
Sheet3, it is deselected, but the other
worksheets remain selected.
Inserting Worksheets
By default, a workbook contains only one worksheet. You may insert up to 32,767
additional worksheets.
➤ To add worksheets using the Workbook Designer:
1. Click on the Workbook to which you want to add worksheets.
2. Select Insert > Worksheet.
A new worksheet is inserted in the workbook. It becomes the active worksheet. Its tab
appears to the left of the tab for the originally selected worksheet, as shown in the
following illustrations.
Before adding a worksheet.
After adding a worksheet.
28
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
Appending Worksheets
Formula One for Java also allows you to append a worksheet — insert a new worksheet
while keeping the current worksheet active.
➤ To append worksheets using the Workbook Designer:
1. Click on the Workbook component to which you want to add worksheets.
2. Select Insert > Worksheet while holding down the control key.
A new worksheet is appended to the workbook. The originally selected worksheet
(Sheet1 in the illustration) remains the active worksheet. The appended worksheet’s
tab appears to the right of the tab for the originally selected worksheet.
Before appending a worksheet.
After appending a worksheet.
The new worksheet is added to the right of the original
worksheet. The original worksheet remains active.
Inserting Multiple Worksheets
The directions below describe how to insert more than one worksheet at a time into
the workbook. The resulting number and position of the tabs of the inserted
worksheets depends on number and position of the tabs of the worksheets in the
workbook prior to inserting multiple worksheets.
➤ To insert more than one worksheet at a time:
1. Select the number of worksheet tabs corresponding to the number of worksheets
you want to insert immediately to the right of where you want to insert the new
worksheet tabs. For example, to insert two worksheets, select two worksheets.
2. Select Insert > Worksheet. The following illustration shows this process:
Since Sheet2 and Sheet1 are selected,
two new worksheets are inserted to the
left of Sheet2.
Notice that the newly inserted worksheets are given
the next available worksheet names, regardless of
their position in the worksheet index list.
Chapter 3 Workbook Fundamentals
29
Naming Worksheets
Formula One for Java provides a default name for each worksheet. You can change the
names to more meaningfully describe the worksheets’ contents.
Double-click the worksheet tab to display
the Sheet Name dialog box.
Type a new name in the Sheet Name dialog box.
➤ To name a worksheet in the Workbook Designer:
1. Double-click the worksheet tab.
2. Type a name for the worksheet in the Sheet Name text box.
3. Click OK.
or
1. Select Format > Sheet > Properties.
2. Click the General tab.
3. Enter the name in the Sheet Name text box.
4. Click OK
Worksheet Index List
Each workbook maintains an indexed list of the worksheets it contains. Worksheets
are indexed from left to right beginning with 0. As you add worksheets, the index is
adjusted so the leftmost worksheet is always index 0. Most methods reference
worksheets by index rather than name. It is important to remember that the worksheet
index is different from the name that appears on the worksheet tab.
Notice in the illustration under “Inserting Worksheets” that the inserted worksheet is
given the next available name “Sheet2.” However, Sheet2 is index 0 and Sheet1 is
index 1.
30
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
Working with Multiple Selected Worksheets
When you have multiple worksheets selected, you can think of them as a group of
worksheets. Some actions you perform affect all worksheets in the group. Other
actions effect only the active worksheet.
In the Workbook Designer, the following actions affect all selected worksheets:
■
changing cell selection
■
entering values via the formula bar
■
inserting rows, columns, or ranges of cells
■
deleting rows, columns, or ranges of cells
■
clearing rows, columns, or ranges of cells
■
setting Top Left/Row/Column header text
■
setting column width
■
setting row height
■
moving and copying with the mouse
Displaying Items on Worksheets
The Workbook Designer allows you to determine how formulas and zero values are
displayed. It lets you zoom in or out on the worksheet cells and determine whether
certain parts of the Workbook Designer are displayed. You may display or hide
horizontal and vertical scroll bars, gridlines, and row and column headings.
➤ To control how worksheets display data and Workbook Designer elements:
1. Select the worksheet or worksheets.
2. Choose the Format > Sheet > Properties option and click the View tab.
3. Check the Formulas box to display formulas in workbook cells. In the View
Formulas mode, number formatting is changed to general and displayed leftaligned. Uncheck the Formulas box to display the computed values and
formatting in workbook cells.
.
Chapter 3 Workbook Fundamentals
31
4. Check the Gridlines box to display the worksheet gridlines. Uncheck it to display
the worksheet without gridlines.
5. Check the Zero Values box to display zeroes in cells when they are entered as
values or calculated by formulas. Uncheck it to leave cells with zero values blank.
6. Check the Row Heading box to display the row headings. Uncheck it to hide row
headings.
7. Check the Column Heading box to display the column headings. Uncheck it to
hide column headings.
8. Choose settings for the Horizontal and Vertical Scrollbars in the Scrollbars
dropdown list boxes. On means scroll bars are displayed; Off means they are
hidden; and Automatic means they are displayed only when the workbook is
active (when it has the input focus).
9. Enter the scale to display the workbook cells and headings in the View Scale box.
You may enter values from 10 to 400. The View Scale setting corresponds to the
setting in the View > Zoom menu.
10.Set the limits of the range reference in the Sheet Limits box. You may enter a
range reference for a sheet with a single row and column (A1:A1) to a sheet with
more than a billion (1,076,741,824) rows and up to 32,768 columns
(A1:AVLH1073741824).
11. Click OK
Controlling Worksheet Usage
Sometimes you may want to keep users from taking certain actions like moving data
from place to place, changing the worksheet layout, or selecting cells or objects. For
each worksheet, you may choose whether to allow users to:
■
use the Arrow, Delete, and Tab keys,
■
enter or edit data in cells,
■
move the active cell using the Enter key,
■
resize rows and columns,
■
fill or move cell ranges by dragging,
■
change row and column headings,
■
enter formulas,
■
select cells and/or objects,
■
select cell-by-cell or row-by-row, and
■
see the active cell.
32
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
➤ To control user access to editing tasks for the selected worksheet(s):
1. Choose the Format > Sheet > Properties option and click the Edit tab.
2. Check or uncheck the appropriate boxes to allow or deny users use of the Arrow
keys, the Delete key, and the Tab key.
3. Check the Enable In-Cell Editing box to allow users to enter data in cells. (See
Note, below.) Checking this box allows users to double-click a cell or press F2 to
cause the cursor to appear in the cell itself instead of in the Formula Bar.
4. Check the Enter Moves Down box to move the active cell down one cell after a
user presses Enter. To leave the active cell in place after a user presses Enter,
leave this box unchecked.
5. Check or uncheck the appropriate boxes to allow or forbid users to resize rows
and columns, to fill or move ranges by dragging, to edit row or column headings,
and to enter formulas. (If the Enter Formulas box is unchecked, Formula One for
Java will beep whenever any cell entry starts with an equals sign.)
6. Click OK.
Note When the Enable In-Cell Editing box is unchecked, users will still be able to
enter data in cells when the Formula Bar is displayed. To deny users editing access,
either hide the Formula Bar or lock the cells. See “Locking Cells and Hiding
Formulas” on page 58.
Chapter 3 Workbook Fundamentals
33
➤ To control user access to selecting tasks for the selected worksheet(s):
1. Choose the Format > Sheet > Properties option and click the Selection tab.
2. Check Allow Selections to allow users to select cells and graphical objects (if the
Allow Object Selections box is also checked). To disallow all selections, both of
cells and graphical objects, uncheck this box.
3. Check Allow Object Selections to allow users to select objects. (In order for this
to work, the Allow Selections box must be checked.) To deny users the ability to
select objects, uncheck this box.
4. Check Row Mode to select the entire row any time a user selects a cell.
5. Choose a setting for the Show Selections drop-down list box. On means users see
which cell or object is selected. Off means users will not see what is selected.
(Users may still enter data, change the selection within a formula with the mouse,
and navigate the worksheet using arrow keys, but they won’t be able to see what
they selected or use the mouse to navigate within the worksheet.) Automatic
means users see the selection only when the workbook has the focus.
6. Click OK.
Deleting Worksheets
➤ To delete a worksheet in the Workbook Designer:
1. Select the worksheet you want to delete.
2. Select Edit > Delete Sheet.
3. Formula One for Java displays a dialog box with the message, “Are you sure you
want to delete the selected sheet(s)?”
4. Click OK to delete the sheet.
34
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
Selecting Items in Worksheets
Selecting means making a part or parts of the worksheet active. You can select cells,
groups of cells, rows, columns, graphical objects, column and row headings. In
general, you must select a cell or object before changing anything about it.
The Active Cell and Ranges of Cells
When you open the Workbook Designer, the cell in the upper left corner has a dark
border around it, marking it as the active cell. Formula One for Java always places
data entered in the active cell. When you select a cell by clicking on it with the mouse
or by navigating to it using the keyboard, you make that cell active.
The active cell can be part of a selection of cells. When more than one cell is selected,
the selection is called a range of cells. The active cell can move within the range. You
may select more than one range of cells (non-adjacent) on a worksheet. Many
operations require one or more cells to be selected.
The following illustration shows three types of cell selections.
Active cell
(single cell selection)
Single range selection
Multiple range selection
Selecting Cells with the Mouse
■
To select a single cell, left-click on it.
■
To select a range of cells, click and hold the left mouse button and drag through
the range you want to select. When a range is selected, it becomes highlighted.
■
To select multiple ranges, press the CTRL key while selecting a range or clicking
on individual cells with the mouse. Any previously selected ranges remain
selected.
Chapter 3 Workbook Fundamentals
35
Once you select a range or multiple ranges, you can move the active cell within the
range without deselecting the range or ranges by using the ENTER, SHIFT + ENTER,
TAB, or SHIFT + TAB keys.
Navigating and Selecting Cells Using the Keyboard
You can use the keyboard to select individual cells (this is sometimes referred to as
moving the active cell) or to select ranges of cells. You can also navigate within a
worksheet using the keyboard.
Keyboard Navigation
Key
Description
Up Arrow
Moves active cell up one row.
Down Arrow
Moves active cell down one row.
Left Arrow
Moves active cell left one column.
Right Arrow
Moves active cell right one column.
CTRL +
Up/Down/Left/Right
Moves active cell to the edge of the next range of cells containing data.
If there is no additional data in the direction in which you are moving,
moves active cell to the edge of the worksheet.
Page Up
Moves active cell up one screen.
Page Down
Moves active cell down one screen.
CTRL Page Up
Moves active cell left one screen.
CTRL Page Down
Moves active cell right one screen.
Home
Moves active cell to first column of current row.
End
Moves active cell to last column of current row that contains data.
CTRL Home
Moves active cell to row 1 column 1.
CTRL End
Moves active cell to last row and column that contains data.
Selecting Cells
To select a range of cells, use the SHIFT key in combination with the above
movement keys. For example, to select a range of cells to the right of the active cell
adding one cell at a time, hold down SHIFT while pressing the Right Arrow key. To
select all the cells to the right of the active cell in the row, hold down SHIFT, CNTRL
and press the Right Arrow Key. You can then press the Down Arrow key to select all
the cells below the active cell in the worksheet.
You must use the mouse to select multiple ranges (two or more non-adjacent ranges).
Selecting Rows and Columns
You can use the mouse to select entire rows and columns in a worksheet at run time or
in the Workbook Designer. To select a row or column, position the pointer on the
header of the row or column you want to select. When you click the header, the row or
column is selected.
36
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
You can also select rows by activating row mode under Format > Sheet > Properties >
Selection and clicking on any cell.
You can select all rows and columns in the worksheet by clicking in the top left
corner.
Click here to select all rows and columns.
Selecting Row and Column Headings
Select all row or column headings to globally apply formatting by pressing
CTRL+Shift and clicking a heading area. To select all column headings, click in the
column heading area. To select all row headings, click in the row heading area. To
select all headings (both columns and rows), continue to hold down CTRL+Shift and
click on both row and column heading areas.
Selecting Graphical Objects
You must use the mouse to select graphical objects you draw with the toolbar buttons.
To select a graphical object, hold down the CTRL key and click inside the object. The
object’s selection handles appear when it is selected.
For more information on selecting graphical objects, see “Selecting Graphical
Objects” on page 99 and “Selecting Chart Elements” on page 138.
Entering and Changing Data
When working in the Workbook Designer you can enter, edit, and delete data in the
worksheet cells.
The following table lists action keys that allow you to enter, edit, and delete data, enter
and exit the edit mode, and recalculate the workbook.
Chapter 3 Workbook Fundamentals
37
Key
Description
Exceptions
ENTER
Accepts the current entry and activates the
next cell down. When a range is selected,
accepts the current entry and activates next
cell in the current selection.
When Enter Moves Down is
deselected, accepts the current
entry and keeps the same cell
active.
SHIFT + ENTER
Accepts the current entry and activates the
next cell up. When a range is selected,
accepts the current entry and activates the
previous cell in the selection.
When Enter Moves Down is
deselected, accepts the current
entry and keeps the same cell
active.
TAB
Accepts the current entry and activates the When Enable Tab Key is
cell horizontally to the right.
deselected, inserts a tab
character in the active cell.
SHIFT +TAB
Accepts the current entry and activates the When Enable Tab Key is
cell horizontally to the left.
deselected, inserts a tab
character in the active cell.
F2
Initiates cell edit mode. Pressing F2 again When Enable In-Cell Editing
(while cell edit mode is initiated) displays in deselected, disallows cell
the Cell Text dialog box, which allows you edit mode.
to enter multi-line data in a single cell.
F9
Recalculates workbook.
none
DEL
Clears current selection.
If Enable Delete Key is
deselected, disallows use of
delete key.
Escape
Cancels current data entry or editing
operation.
none
Saving Workbooks
When you save a workbook, Formula One saves the current view settings. When a
view is attached to a workbook, the view settings are retrieved from the workbook.
Opening and Saving
Formula One for Java reads and writes several file formats. The following table lists
Formula One for Java compatible file formats and associated file name extensions.
Format
File Extension
Description
Formula One for Java
.vts
Formula One 3.x, 4.x, 5.x, 6.x and 7.x formats.
Excel 5.0, 7.0, 97, and 2000 .xls
Microsoft Excel 5.0, 7.0, 97, and 2000 formats.
Tabbed-Text
Tab-delimited text file including number
formatting information.
.txt
38
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
Format
File Extension
Description
Tabbed-Text values only
.txt
Tab-delimited text without formatting
information.
HTML
.htm/.html
hypertext markup language.
HTML data only
.htm/.html
hypertext markup language without formatting
information.
Since Formula One for Java has features not supported by Excel, files saved in the
VTS file format cannot be read by Excel. In the XLS format each record represents a
unique feature or property of the workbook. The VTS file format uses a significantly
more efficient method of storing records.
If your file contains features not supported by Excel, saving the workbook as an XLS
file removes these features. Likewise, Excel contains features not supported by
Formula One for Java. Unsupported features are ignored when Formula One for Java
loads an Excel worksheet or workbook.
Important If you load an Excel file that contains features not supported by Formula
One for Java those features are ignored. If you then write the imported file from
Formula One for Java as an Excel file those features are lost.
Formula One for Java cannot read password-protected Excel files. If you intend to
read files from Excel, do not password-protect them.
Using the Mouse with Worksheets
The mouse is used primarily to select items in a worksheet at run time. The following
table lists the mouse actions you can perform in a worksheet.
Action
Description
Click on a cell
Moves the active cell to the pointer position.
Click in row or column headings
Selects entire row or column.
Click in top left corner
Selects entire worksheet.
Double-click
Invokes edit mode.
Double-click in row or column headings
Displays a dialog box that allows you to enter a
label for the column or row heading.
Double-click in top left corner
Displays a dialog box that allows you to enter a
label for the top left corner.
Double-click in worksheet tabs
Displays a dialog box that allows you to enter a
new name for the worksheet.
Click and drag
Selects a range. If other ranges are selected, the
previously selected ranges are unselected.
CTRL + click and drag
Selects a range. If other ranges are selected, they
remain selected.
Chapter 3 Workbook Fundamentals
39
Action
Description
SHIFT + click and drag
Extends the current selection.
CTRL + SHIFT click on row headings,
column headings, or top left corner
Selects all the row headings, all the column
headings, or top left corner of the worksheet.
Holding down CTRL +SHIFT while clicking
Row Headings, Column Headings, and Top Left
Corner selects them all.
Drag a range’s copy handle
Copies the range into the cells you drag across.
Drag a range’s border
Moves the range to a new location.
CTRL + click on a chart, picture, drawing
or forms object
Selects the object.
CTRL + click on cells
Selects one or more ranges. Holding down the
CTRL key allows you to select multiple ranges.
ALT + click and drag a selected object
Repositions an object and aligns object sides with
the cell grid.
ALT + click and drag an object’s selection Resizes an object and aligns object sides with the
handles
cell grid.
Right-click on a chart
Brings up the chart context menu.
Tidestone
41
C H A P T E R
4
Working With Data
Entering and manipulating data in cells is the basis for nearly all work performed in a
workbook. You can enter virtually any type of data in a cell. You can also enter
formulas to calculate and evaluate data that appears in other cells.
This chapter covers the following topics that give you basic information about
entering data.
■
“Types of Data” on page 42
■
“How to Enter Constant Values” on page 42
■
“How to Enter Formulas” on page 44
■
“Ways to Enter Data” on page 48
■
“Understanding Cell References” on page 49
This chapter also covers the following advanced topics that give more detailed
information and explain special techniques for working with data.
■
“Using Names” on page 54
■
“Using Autofill Lists” on page 54
■
“Validating Data” on page 56
■
“Identifying Formulas on Worksheets” on page 57
■
“Locking Cells and Hiding Formulas” on page 58
■
“Calculating Worksheets” on page 60
■
“Understanding Worksheet Errors” on page 62
42
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
Types of Data
Cells can contain two types of data: constant values and formulas.
■
Constant values are data that you enter that is not calculated or evaluated.
Constant values are usually numbers (including dates and times) or text.
These are examples of constant values:
■
First Quarter
$14.32
4/16/98
43%
7.58E-01
3/4
Jones, Felicia
TRUE
4,762
Miles of highway
0.121435236
4:30 PM
Formulas are special entries in cells that tell Formula One for Java to do a
particular calculation or comparison. Cells that contain formulas display values
that are the results of the calculation. Formulas are always preceded by an equal
sign. They can contain constant values, cell references, names, functions, and
operators.
These are examples of formulas:
=1+2*3-4
=B12 / 4 * B13
=SUM(1,2,3,4,5)
=AVERAGE(C2:C9)
How to Enter Constant Values
Constant values are data that is not calculated or evaluated. That is, Formula One for
Java does not change the number or text you enter. However, sometimes the way you
enter a constant value makes Formula One for Java interpret that value in a certain
way. This is because of number formats.
Number formats are patterns that Formula One for Java uses for displaying numbers.
A date format, for example, might require Formula One for Java to display the data as
3 sets of 2 numbers divided by slashes. Any date with that format follows that pattern.
For more information on number formats, see “About Number Formats” on page 64.
Formula One for Java automatically applies some of its built-in number formats based
on how you enter the constant value. The following sections describe how to enter
different types of constant values to get the results you want.
Chapter 4 Working With Data
43
Numbers as Constant Values
Numeric entries can (of course) contain the numeric characters 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9,
and 0. They can also contain commas to separate thousands, periods for decimal
points, and the following special characters: +, -, (, ), /, $, %, E, and e.
■
■
Negative numbers can be preceded by a minus sign or enclosed in parentheses.
Fractions can be entered using the slash. If the fractional value contains a leading
integer (e.g., 1 1/3) it can be entered directly. If there is no leading integer, the
fraction should be preceded by a zero (e.g., 0 2/3).
■
Currency can be entered using a leading dollar sign.
■
Percentages can be entered using a trailing percent sign.
■
Long numbers that are larger than the cell in which they are entered are converted
to scientific notation unless a specific format is applied.
Dates and Times as Constant Values
Formula One for Java automatically recognizes numeric entries that use slashes,
hyphens, certain text strings, and colons as dates and times. When you enter a date or
time as a value in a cell, Formula One for Java automatically applies a date or time
format to that value.
Formula One for Java automatically recognizes data entered in the following ways as
dates and/or times and applies the indicated format to that data.
Entered
Format Assigned
3/15/94
mm/dd/yy
15-Mar-94
d-mmm-yy
15-Mar
d-mmm
Mar-94
mmm-yy
9:55 PM
h:mm AM/PM
9:55:33 PM
h:mm:ss AM/PM
21:55
h:mm
21:55:33
h:mm:ss
3/15/94 21:55
mm/dd/yy h:mm
Text as Constant Values
Text is any set of characters that Formula One for Java does not recognize as a
number, date, or time.
Text that is wider than a cell ordinarily spills over into the cell immediately to the
right, if that cell is empty. You can specify that text should wrap within the cell by
enabling word wrap in your alignment format settings. For information, see “Aligning
Cell Data” on page 73.
44
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
If you want numbers to be treated as text in a worksheet, precede the number with a
tick mark (’).
Logical and Error Values as Constant Values
Logical values are the words TRUE and FALSE. Error values are messages Formula
One for Java gives you when a formula you entered can’t be computed. For a list of
the error messages and what they mean, see “Understanding Worksheet Errors” on
page 62.
Logical and error values are usually not entered directly in cells; they are usually the
result of a formula. However, entering these values can be useful for testing formulas.
How to Enter Formulas
Formulas are the basic building blocks for analyzing and calculating worksheet data.
A formula is a special entry in a cell that tells Formula One for Java to do a particular
calculation or comparison. Cells that contain formulas display or return values that are
the results of the calculation. The returned values can be numbers, logical values
(TRUE and FALSE), or text.
Formulas consist of strings containing numbers, text, logical values, mathematical
operators, worksheet functions, cell references, and names. A formula can contain as
many as 1024 characters.
➤ To enter a formula in a cell:
■
Begin the entry with an equal sign (=).
Formula One for Java recognizes cell contents beginning with equal signs as formulas.
Numbers in Formulas
Usually you can enter a number in a formula by simply typing the number. Number
formats do not apply to numbers within formulas, so the rules for entering numbers in
formulas are different than the rules for entering numbers as constant values.
■
■
■
■
■
■
Thousands should be entered without the comma separator, because the comma
will be interpreted as separating two range references (see “Operators in
Formulas” on page 46).
Negative numbers are entered using the negative sign (-). Do not use parentheses:
the formula interprets parentheses as separators, not as negators.
Fractions can be entered by using a slash for the fraction separator (3/4 is
evaluated as .75).
Percentages can be entered using the percent sign (34% is evaluated as .34).
Scientific notation can be used for very large or very small numbers (34E+09 is
evaluated as 34,000,000,000).
Exponents can be entered using the caret sign (3^4 is evaluated as three to the
fourth power, or 81).
Chapter 4 Working With Data
■
45
Dates and times may be entered in two ways: as serial numbers, or in one of the
conventional formats (e.g., m/d/yy) enclosed in quotation marks. Dates and times
entered in this way are considered text, but Formula One for Java recognizes them
as dates and internally converts them to their serial number values. For example,
“10/10/94”-“10/1/94” is interpreted as 9.
Text in Formulas
Formulas can manipulate text just as they manipulate numbers. Text in formulas must
be enclosed in quotation marks. Without the quotation marks, the formula will return
the #NAME? error.
If a number is encountered when text is expected, the number is converted to text.
“Quarter ”&3 is interpreted as Quarter 3. If text is encountered when a number is
expected, the text is converted to a number (1 + “3” is interpreted as 4). If the text
cannot be converted to a valid number (1 + “banana”), the formula will return the
#VALUE! error.
You can use the < and > characters in formulas to determine if a text string is
alphabetized before or after another text string.
Concatenation in Formulas
You may use the ampersand (&) character to concatenate text strings when a text
argument from two different sources is required. For example, in the spreadsheet
below, cell A3 uses concatenation to create the text first quarter.
Cell A3 uses the ampersand to concatenate text in
cell A1 with other text.
Logical Values in Formulas
The logical value TRUE converts to 1, while FALSE converts to 0.
If a number is encountered when a logical value is expected, 0 is evaluated as FALSE
and all other numbers are evaluated as TRUE. If text is encountered when a logical
value is expected, “TRUE” is evaluated as TRUE, “FALSE” is evaluated as FALSE, and
all other text returns the #VALUE! error.
46
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
Operators in Formulas
The following mathematical operators let you specify the type of calculation or
evaluation to be performed in the formula.
Operator Type
Arithmetic
Operator
Description
+
Addition
-
Subtraction
/
Division
*
Multiplication
%
Percentage
^
Exponentiation
Text
&
Concatenation
Comparison
=
Equal to
>
Greater than
<
Less than
>=
Greater than or equal to
<=
Less then or equal to
<>
Not equal to
Reference
:, .., .
,
Range. Produces a reference that includes all the cells
between the two references (e.g., A1:A5 includes cells A1,
A2, A3, A4, and A5).
Union. Produces one reference that includes the two
references (e.g., A1:A10,C1:C10).
Operator Precedence in Formulas
When more than one of the operators appears in a formula, Formula One for Java uses
a specific order of precedence to calculate the formula. The operators listed first in the
following table are evaluated before the operators below them.
Operator
(
)
:
..
Description
Parentheses
.
Range
,
Union
-
Negation (when used in front of a constant or variable)
%
Percentage
^
Exponentiation
*
/
Multiplication and Division
Chapter 4 Working With Data
Operator
+
Description
Addition and Subtraction (when used between two constants or
variables)
-
&
=
47
Text concatenation
<
>
<= >= <>
Comparison
When two or more operators on the same line in the table above appear in a formula,
Formula One for Java evaluates them from left to right.
Use parentheses to change the order of evaluation. The following example illustrates
how the result of a formula can be altered by adding parentheses to change the order
of precedence.
Formula
Result
=1+2*37
75
=(1+2)*37
111
Worksheet Functions
Functions are a particular kind of formula that let you perform complex calculations
with very little work. Formula One for Java contains a set of built-in worksheet
functions. Refer to the companion manual, “Formula One for Java Function
Reference,” for additional information about functions.
Changing Formula Evaluation Rules
In general, Formula One for Java evaluates formulas the way Microsoft Excel does.
The Lotus 1-2-3 spreadsheet program evaluates formulas in a slightly different way.
Lotus 1-2-3’s rules always interpret the logical value TRUE as 1, FALSE as 0. Also,
text in cells referred to by formulas and in function arguments is always evaluated as 0
(zero).
You can use Lotus 1-2-3’s evaluation rules instead of Microsoft Excel’s on any
worksheet. You can even have different worksheets in the same workbook use
different evaluation rules.
➤ To use Lotus 1-2-3 evaluation rules:
1. Select the worksheet(s) whose formulas you want to evaluate using Lotus 1-2-3
rules.
2. Choose Format > Sheet > Properties and click the General tab.
3. Check the Lotus Style Formula Evaluation check box.
4. Click OK.
48
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
Ways to Enter Data
You can enter constant values and formulas into worksheet cells in several ways.
Using the Formula Bar
The formula bar is an empty text box at the top of the workbook. You can enter data
into the active cell on a worksheet by typing the data into the formula bar and pressing
ENTER.
The cell reference indicator, a gray box to the left of the formula bar, shows the
address of the active cell. The data entered in the formula bar will go in this cell.
The formula bar is a text box for entering cell data.
The cell reference indicator displays the address of the
active cell.
The formula bar appears by default in the Workbook Designer. You can display or
hide the formula bar and cell reference indicator.
➤ To control the display of the formula bar and cell reference indicator:
■
Select View > Formula Bar to toggle the display of the formula bar and cell
reference indicator.
Using Edit Mode
If you click on a cell with data in it, or navigate to a cell with the ENTER, TAB, or
arrow keys, anything you type in that cell will replace the current cell contents.
If you don’t want to replace data that was previously entered, you may use Formula
One for Java’s edit mode.
➤ To enter edit mode:
1. Make the cell you want to edit active.
2. Use any of the following three ways to enter edit mode:
Click in the Formula Bar.
Double-click on the cell.
Press F2.
Once you are in edit mode, you may use the arrow keys to move around in the text just
as you would in a word processing program.
Chapter 4 Working With Data
49
Entering Multi-Line Data
A single cell can contain multiple lines of data and up to 255 characters. To enter
more than one line of data, you need to specify carriage return/line feeds to indicate
line breaks.
➤ To enter multi-line data:
1. When the cursor is displayed in a cell, press F2 to enter edit mode.
2. Press F2 again. The Cell Text dialog box is displayed for cell data entry, as shown
below.
3. Enter a line of data.
4. To enter a line feed, press RETURN.
5. Click OK to accept the entry and return to normal worksheet editing.
The following illustration shows the results of a multi-line entry.
The multi-line entry is placed in cell A1. Row 1 and column A have been
resized so the entry is not cropped.
You can also enter multi-line row and column headings. See “Setting Row and
Column Heading Text” on page 82 for more information.
Understanding Cell References
A reference is a cell’s address. It identifies a cell or range of cells by referring to the
column letter and row number of the cell(s). For example, A1 refers to the cell at the
intersection of column A and row 1.
The reference tells Formula One for Java to use the contents of the referenced cell(s)
in the formula. If a formula requires a number, you can substitute a reference to a cell
that contains a number.
50
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
You specify a range of cells by placing a colon (:) between two cell references. For
example, A1:C3 refers to the range anchored by cells A1 and C3. The range includes
all cells in columns A, B, and C of rows 1, 2, and 3.
The range reference A1:C3
refers to all the grayed cells
in this worksheet.
Entering Cell References
You can enter cell references in formulas in three ways:
■
Type in the cell or range address.
■
Type in the name of a named cell or range. For information on defining names,
see “Using Names” on page 54.
■
Use the mouse to click and drag on cells and ranges. Formula One for Java
automatically enters a relative reference identifying the cell(s) you select.
Absolute and Relative References
There are two types of cell references: relative and absolute.
■
Relative references point to a cell based on its position relative to the current cell.
When the cell containing the reference is moved or copied, the reference is
adjusted to point to a new cell with the same relative offset as the originally
referenced cell.
For example, suppose the formula =B1+B2+B3 is located in cell A1. When you
copy the formula and paste it down two rows into cell A3, the formula will be
adjusted down two rows, to =B3+B4+B5.
Relative references will be adjusted whenever you cut or copy and paste a
formula or when you use the Edit > Fill commands to fill a range with a copy of a
formula.
■
Absolute references point to a cell at an exact location. When a cell containing a
formula with absolute references is moved or copied, the reference does not
change. Absolute references have a dollar sign ($) in front of the row number
and/or column letter.
References that are part absolute and part relative are called mixed references. The
following table lists the reference types.
Reference
Type
A1
Relative reference pointing to cell A1.
$A$1
Absolute reference pointing to cell A1.
Chapter 4 Working With Data
Reference
Type
$A1
Absolute column reference, relative row reference pointing to cell A1.
A$1
Relative column reference, absolute row reference pointing to cell A1.
51
Using Relative and Absolute References
You can copy and paste absolute, relative, and mixed references to create worksheets
that are easy to update and that are smaller than worksheets where each formula is
created separately.
For example, in the following worksheet, the values in column A need to be
multiplied by the percentages in row 1.
To do these calculations, you could enter the formula =A2*B1 in cell B2, =A3*B1 in cell
B3, =A4*B1 in cell B4, etc. Besides the fact that this would require a lot of typing, this
solution would require Formula One for Java to keep nine separate formulas in
memory.
A better way to do it would be to enter the formula =$A2*B$1 in cell B2, and use the
worksheet’s Edit > Fill command to fill cells B2 through D4 with copies of that
formula. When the formula is copied in this manner, its relative references change, but
the absolute references stay the same.
Enter the formula...
Edit > Fill > Down to fill column B...
Edit > Fill > Right to fill columns C and D.
52
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
The resulting worksheet calculates all the figures using multiple copies of that one
formula. Only one formula must be kept in memory.
If you change the percentages in row 1 or the figures in column A, the calculations in
the worksheet will automatically change because of the absolute references to those
cells. This makes the worksheet easy to update.
References to Other Worksheets
You can reference cells in other worksheets in the same workbook by placing an
exclamation mark between the sheet name and the reference. The sheet name is the
name found on the worksheet tab. For example, Data!A1 refers to the top left cell in a
sheet called Data.
Sheet names with spaces. If the sheet name contains spaces, you must enclose the
name in single quotes: ‘1994 sales’!B17.
Cells on two worksheets. You can make a reference to cells on two different
worksheets by placing a colon between the two sheet names. For example,
Sheet1:Sheet2!A1 refers to two cells: cell A1 in Sheet1 and cell A1 in Sheet2.
Order of sheet names. References to more than one worksheet must list the worksheets
in the order in which they appear in the workbook.
References to cells in both Able
and Baker must list Able first.
Chapter 4 Working With Data
53
References to Other Workbooks
References that point to cells on worksheets in other workbooks are called external
references.
An external reference is created by placing the workbook name in brackets, followed
by the worksheet name, an exclamation point, and finally a cell or range reference.
[Sales]1998!A1
Brackets enclose the
workbook name.
An exclamation mark
follows the worksheet
name.
The workbook name must appear
between brackets. You do not have
to enter the VTS or XLS extension.
The cell or range
reference appears last.
The worksheet name, taken from
the worksheet tab, appears between
the closing bracket and the
exclamation mark.
External references will work only if both workbooks are open in the Workbook
Designer. If the referenced workbook is not open when you create the external
reference, an Invalid Formula Syntax error message will appear.
The following are examples of external references using absolute, relative, and mixed
references.
Reference
Type
[Sales]1987!A1
Relative reference pointing to cell A1 in a worksheet titled
1987 of a workbook titled Sales.
[FY91]January!$A$1
Absolute reference pointing to cell A1 in a worksheet titled
January of a workbook titled FY91.
[Q1]Sheet1:Sheet2!$A1
Absolute column reference, relative row reference pointing to
cell A1 in the first and second worksheets of a workbook
titled Q1.
[Store1]Sheet1:Sheet4!A1:F1
Relative row and column reference pointing to the range A1
to F1 in the first four worksheets of a workbook titled Store1.
Paths in External References
After you enter an external reference, Formula One for Java will change the format of
the reference to show the absolute path to the workbook you referenced. For example,
say you entered this reference to a workbook named September in the Payroll
directory on your C drive:
[September]Payroll!C2:C420
After you enter that reference, if you return to the cell where the reference was
entered, you will note that Formula One for Java has changed it to:
‘[C:\Payroll\September.vts]Payroll’!C2:C420
54
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
This absolute path is recorded in the worksheet. If you later move the September
workbook, the external reference should still work, as long as you open September.vts
in the Workbook Designer at the same time as the workbook that references it.
Using Names
User-defined names are an easy way to identify a cell, a range of cells, a value, or a
formula. For example, the formula =Sales-Expenses is much clearer than =A10-A6.
When you create a name for a range of cells, you can use that name (without
quotation marks) in formulas.
You can also use names to identify constants and formula expressions. For example,
you might define the name LtSp as 186000. You could then use the name LtSp in all
your formulas.
➤ To define names:
1. If you are naming a range, select it.
2. Select Insert > Name. The Defined Name dialog, shown below, will appear.
Enter the name of the
range, formula, or
constant here. Do not
use spaces in the
name.
Click here to
add a new
name.
Click here to
delete the
selected name.
All the user-defined
names in the workbook
appear here.
If you selected a cell or range, its reference appears here. You may edit
it. You may also enter a formula or constant value that you want to name.
3. When you are finished, click OK.
Do not use the names Print_Area or Print_Titles. Formula One for Java reserves
those names for its own use.
Using Autofill Lists
If you frequently use lists of names, months, or days of the week in your worksheet,
you can let Formula One for Java do some of the work for you by using the autofill
feature.
Formula One for Java’s default autofill lists contain frequently used series of text such
as months of the year and days of the week. When you enter one of the elements in
Chapter 4 Working With Data
55
these lists and drag the copy handle, Formula One for Java enters the rest of the data
from the list as needed to fill the range you mark.
When Formula One for Java recognizes
this text as part of an autofill list, and . . .
you drag the copy handle to this position...
the cells in the marked range are
automatically filled with items from the list.
Once Formula One for Java has recognized the text as an item from an autofill list,
pressing TAB puts the next list item into the next cell to the right. Pressing ENTER
puts the next list item into the next cell below.
Creating Autofill Lists
You can add custom autofill lists that include frequently used series of text.
Note Autofill lists must contain text values in order to work properly. You can create
an autofill list that contains numbers, but Formula One for Java will not recognize
those numbers as members of an autofill list and will not automatically fill the range
with them.
➤ To add a new autofill list:
1. Select Tools > Options.
2. Click on the Auto Fill tab, shown below.
Select the autofill list whose entries
you want to edit. To create a new list,
choose (New List).
After entering the new list items in
the Current List box, click here to
create the new list.
Click here to delete the displayed
list.
Enter or edit the autofill list items
here, separating items with
semicolons.
3. Click Apply to see your changes or OK to accept your changes.
Caution Formula One for Java saves this autofill list information only during the
current working session in the current workbook. When you close the workbook, the
autofill list information is not saved.
56
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
Validating Data
You can limit data entry by specifying a validation rule for a cell. A validation rule
consists of a formula to test the cell entry against and text to display if the validation
fails. The formula must return either TRUE or FALSE. If the formula returns TRUE,
the value is entered. If the formula returns FALSE, the value is not entered and the
validation text is displayed in an error dialog box.
For example, you can limit the range of values a user can enter in a cell by creating a
rule that fails if the user enters a number less than 100 and displays the message
“Enter a value greater than 100.”
You can use relative references in validation rules. These references are considered to
be relative to the active cell. This allows a validation rule to be properly applied to an
entire range.
Note Microsoft Excel’s validation rules are incompatible with Formula One for
Java’s. Any validation rules will be deleted if you export a Formula One for Java file
to Excel and vice versa.
➤ To create a validation rule:
1. Select the cell(s) for which you want to create a validation rule.
2. Select Format > Cells to display the Format Cells dialog box.
3. Select the Validation tab, shown below.
Enter the validation
formula here. It must
return the logical
values TRUE or
FALSE. Do not enter
the equals sign.
Enter the text to
display if the data fails
the validation test.
Since new validation
rules have no effect on
the cell’s current
contents, the sample
cells displayed here
will not change.
4. Click OK to accept your changes.
Chapter 4 Working With Data
57
This message will appear when the data entered in cell A1 fails the
validation rule.
The Validation Formula
The validation formula must be a worksheet formula that evaluates to TRUE or
FALSE. Following are several examples of validation formulas.
SUM(A6:A7)>A5
AND(A6>1,A6<100)
IF(A7>1,A7<100,A7>0)
OR(ISLOGICAL(A7),A7=1,A7=0)
Note Validation rules are only checked if data is entered by typing it in and pressing
ENTER. Any other way of entering data, such as selecting a value from a check box,
bypasses validation.
Identifying Formulas on Worksheets
Formula One for Java gives you two tools to help you identify cells that contain
formulas: type markers and view options.
Type Markers
Type markers are colored borders around cells that identify the type of data in the cell.
By default, type markers are not displayed.
Type marker color
Data in cell
Green
Values
Red
Formulas and functions
Blue
Empty, formatted cells
➤ To display type markers:
1. Choose Tools > Options and click the General tab, if necessary.
2. Check the Type Markers box, then click OK.
58
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
View Options
By default, the workbook designer displays the results of formula calculations in the
cells where formulas are entered. You may choose to display the formula instead.
➤ To display formulas instead of the results of the formulas:
1. Select the worksheet(s) on which you want to see formulas.
2. Choose Format > Sheet > Properties and click the View tab, if necessary.
3. Check the Formulas check box, then click OK.
When you choose to view formulas, Formula One for Java automatically doubles the
column widths of the worksheet(s) to provide space for the formulas. It also left-aligns
all cells on that worksheet and displays all numbers in the General format. Unchecking the Formulas check box will shrink the columns back to their original size
and return the alignment and formatting to their original settings.
Locking Cells and Hiding Formulas
Locking cells prevents users from entering data or formulas into those cells. You can
lock all the cells in the worksheet, or you can choose which cells you want to lock.
Locking cells is a two-step process: First you choose which cells you want to be
locked and which unlocked. Then you choose to enable cell protection. The cells will
not be shielded from edits until you lock them AND enable the protection. You may
change the protection features on your worksheet by locking/unlocking individual
cells or by enabling/disabling the protection.
By default, worksheet cells are locked and protection is disabled.
In addition to locking cells, you can hide cell formulas from appearing in the formula
bar.
➤ To lock and unlock cells and/or hide formulas in a worksheet:
1. Select the cells you want to lock or unlock.
2. Select Format > Cells and click the Protection tab, shown below.
Chapter 4 Working With Data
59
Check this box to lock the
selected cells when
protection is enabled.
Check this box to keep
formulas in the selected
cell(s) from appearing in the
formula bar when those
cells are made active. This
option only works when
protection is enabled.
Since locking and hiding
have no effect on how the
cell contents appear, the
sample cells displayed here
will not change.
3. Click OK.
4. Enable protection. See below.
➤ To enable and disable cell protection on a worksheet:
■
Select Format > Sheet > Enable Protection. A check by the Enable Protection
menu item means that locked cells cannot be entered or changed. It also means
that cells designated Hidden that contain formulas will not display those formulas
in the formula bar.
A user who attempts to enter data in a locked cell will see this dialog box.
When a locked cell is selected, the ENTER, SHIFT-ENTER, TAB, and SHIFT-TAB
keys advance the selection to the next unlocked cell.
Note The Enable In-Cell Editing check box on the Edit tab in the Format Sheet dialog
box also controls whether or not users can enter data in cells. For more information,
see “Controlling Worksheet Usage” on page 31.
60
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
Calculating Worksheets
Formula One for Java calculates cells in natural order, which means that all
dependencies are calculated before their dependents. This ensures that the formulas
return correct results.
When a worksheet is edited, Formula One for Java adjusts formula references so they
point to the correct cells, then determines the natural order of the formulas.
When data or a formula in a cell changes or when cells are added or deleted, all the
formulas on all the worksheets in the workbook are recalculated in order to ensure that
data is always valid.
Setting Automatic Recalculation
By default, automatic recalculation is enabled. With this setting, Formula One for Java
recalculates the worksheet each time a cell is changed and system processing is idle.
For moderately-sized worksheets, recalculation operations happen in a fraction of a
second. But for large worksheets or situations where many cells are changed by code,
this reorganization and recalculation process can slow system processing.
In these situations, it is sometimes desirable to disable automatic recalculation while
your code operates on the worksheet. When the operation is finished, automatic
recalculation can be enabled and the worksheet can be updated.
➤ To change automatic recalculation:
1. Select Tools > Options.
2. Select the Calculation tab, shown below.
Uncheck this check box to disable
automatic recalculation.
3. Click OK.
Chapter 4 Working With Data
61
Solving Circular References
Sometimes a formula refers to its own cell, either directly or indirectly. This is called a
circular reference. To solve a formula that contains a circular reference, iteration must
be used. Iteration is the process of repeatedly calculating a worksheet until a specific
condition is met. Formula One for Java supports iteration through settings specified in
the Calculation tab of the Options dialog box. The following example includes a
circular reference:
Suppose your small business has 10,000 shares of stock owned by four shareholders.
You decide to let a fifth shareholder enter your partnership. In return for his
investment, you give him 10 percent of the company. How many more shares will the
company have to issue to give the new investor 10% of the company?
The following illustration shows the results of this example as it appears in a
worksheet.
he formulas in B2 and B3 create a circular reference.
the formula text
the results of the formulas
➤ To control the number of times a circular reference is calculated:
1. Select Tools > Options and click the Calculation tab.
2. Click the Iteration check box to limit iteration for calculating circular references.
3. In the Maximum Iterations text box, type the maximum number of iterations you
want Formula One for Java to execute.
4. In the Maximum Change text box, type the maximum change between iterations.
The smaller the number, the more accurate your answer is.
5. Click OK.
Setting Calculation Precision
Formula One for Java’s calculation engine calculates formulas and functions to a high
degree of precision. Some of the numbers on your worksheets may be calculated out
to many more decimal places than you want. You can specify the number of decimal
places to round calculated and constant values so that Formula One for Java doesn’t
store data you don’t need.
You set precision by applying number formats to cells, then telling Formula One for
Java to truncate values in the formatted cells to the precision specified by the format.
For information on number formats, see “About Number Formats” on page 64.
62
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
When you set precision, you set it for all cells that have number formats applied to
them in all worksheets in the workbook. You can’t set precision for some worksheets
in a workbook and not others.
➤ To set calculation precision:
1. Apply number formats containing the desired number of decimal places to the
cells whose precision you want to specify.
2. Select Tools > Options and click the Calculation tab.
3. Check the Precision as Displayed checkbox.
4. The system will display the message “Precision as Displayed will permanently
change data accuracy. Continue?”
5. Click OK to accept or Cancel to dismiss the dialog without setting precision.
Important If you set Precision as Displayed on a workbook that already has values
and formulas entered in it, Formula One for Java will round off the constant and
calculated values to the specified precision. Once this rounding has taken place, it
can’t be undone — the data is lost.
Understanding Worksheet Errors
When a formula cannot be properly calculated, an error is returned in the cell. The
following table lists the errors that can be generated and their causes.
Error
Cause
#DIV/0!
Divide by zero. May be caused by a reference to a blank cell or a cell
containing zero.
#FORMULA!
Formula cannot be calculated. May be caused when opening a workbook
from another file format.
#N/A
No value is available. May be caused by inappropriate values in the
formula or by a reference to a cell containing the #N/A value.
#NAME?
Name is not recognized. May be caused because a user-defined name is
not defined, a function name is misspelled, or you are using an add-in
function whose JAR file is not in your class path.
#NULL!
Null intersection. An intersection of two ranges that do not intersect was
specified.
#NUM!
Number problem. May be caused by inappropriate numbers in functions,
an iteration that cannot solve for a value, or a formula that results in a
number too large or too small to represent.
#REF!
Reference error. May be caused by referring to a cell whose data was
deleted.
#VALUE!
Wrong data type. May be caused by entering text where a number was
expected or by supplying a range to an operator or function that was
expecting a single value.
63
C H A P T E R
5
Formatting Worksheets
Formatting means changing how information looks on a worksheet. The most frequent
kind of formatting is number formatting, which lets you specify that the number 4.75
should appear as 475%, as $4.75, or even as 1/4/00. Formatting also includes topics
like cell width and height, cell colors and outlines, fonts and text alignment, etc.
Formula One for Java supports a rich set of data and worksheet formatting
capabilities. This chapter covers the following topics:
■
“About Number Formats” on page 64
■
“Using Built-in Number Formats” on page 64
■
“Creating Custom Number Formats” on page 67
■
“Formatting Fonts” on page 72
■
“Aligning Cell Data” on page 73
■
“Changing Row Height and Column Width” on page 73
■
“Freezing Panes” on page 77
■
“Applying Colors to Worksheets and Cells” on page 78
■
“Formatting Row and Column Headings” on page 81
■
“Copying Formats” on page 83
■
“Formatting to Maximize Memory” on page 84
64
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
About Number Formats
Number formats are patterns that Formula One for Java uses for displaying numbers.
A date format, for example, might require Formula One for Java to display the data as
3 sets of 2 numbers divided by slashes, for example, 11/11/98. Any date with that
format follows that pattern.
Formula One for Java comes with a set of built-in number formats for the basic forms
numbers take, such as currency, dates, times, percent values, fractions, and scientific
notation. For a list of the built-in number formats, see “Built-in Number Formats, by
Category” on page 65.
When you create a worksheet for the first time, by default all cells have the General
format applied to them, which means numbers are displayed basically as you enter
them. As you begin entering numeric values in the worksheet, Formula One for Java
automatically applies some of its built-in number formats based on the characters and
numbers you enter and the order you enter them in. For example, if you enter
2/15/64, the slashes and the arrangement of the numbers tell Formula One for Java
that this is a date, and the m/d/yy date format is applied. For more information, see
“How to Enter Constant Values” on page 42.
If Formula One for Java did not automatically apply the number format you wanted,
or if you want to change to a different number format, you can apply a built-in number
format to the cell. For information, see “Using Built-in Number Formats” on page 64.
If you don’t find the number format you want in the list of built-in number formats,
you may create your own number format. For information, see “Creating Custom
Number Formats” on page 67.
Using Built-in Number Formats
➤ To apply number formats:
1. Select the cell(s) for which you want to change the number format.
2. Select Format > Cells and select the Number tab, shown below.
Chapter 5 Formatting Worksheets
65
3. Select the category from the Category list. The number formats in that category
will appear in the Number Format list box.
4. Choose one of the number formats in the Number Format list box. You may also
type in the name of the number format in the Number Format text box.
5. Click OK.
Built-in Number Formats, by Category
The following tables show the built-in number formats for a US English locale by
category. They also show the result of applying the number format to data appropriate
for its category.
Number
3
-3
.3
General
3
-3
.3
0
3
-3
0
3.00
-3.00
0.30
3
-3
0
3.00
-3.00
0.30
0.00
#,##0
#,##0.00
Currency
3
-3
.3
$#,##0_);($#,##0)
$3
($3)
$0
$#,##0_);[Red]($#,##0)
$3
($3) in red
$0
$#,##0.00_);($#,##0.00)
$3.00
($3.00)
$0.30
$#,##0.00_);[Red]($#,##0.00)
$3.00
($3.00) in red
$0.30
3
(3)
0
#,##0_);(#,##0)
66
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
Currency
3
-3
.3
#,##0_);[Red](#,##0)
3
(3) in red
0
#,##0.00_);(#,##0.00)
3.00
(3.00)
0.30
#,##0.00_);[Red](#,##0.00)
3.00
(3.00) in red
0.30
_(* #,##0_);(* #,##0);_(* "-"_);_(@_)
3
_(* #,##0.00_);(* #,##0.00);_(* "-"??_);_(@_)
3.00
_($* #,##0_);($* #,##0);_($* "-"_);_(@_)
$
3
_($* #,##0.00_);($* #,##0.00);_($* "-"??_);_(@_)
$
3.00
Date
04/18/95
m/d/yy
04/18/95
d-mmm-yy
18-Apr-95
d-mmm
18-Apr
mmm-yy
Apr-95
Time
12:02:02
h:mm AM/PM
12:02 PM
h:mm:ss AM/PM
12:02:02 PM
h:mm
12:02 PM
h:mm:ss
12:02:02
m/d/yy h:mm
1/0/1900 12:02 PM
mm:ss
02:02
[h]:mm:ss
12:02:02
mm:ss.0
Percent
02:02.0
3
-3
.3
300%
-300%
30%
300.00%
-300.00%
30.00%
Fraction
3
-3
.3
# ?/?
3
-3
2/7
# ??/??
3
-3
3/10
Scientific
3
-3
.3
0.00E+00
3.00E+00
-3.00E+00
3.00E-01
##0.0E+0
300.0E-2
-300.0E-2
300.0E-3
0%
0.00%
(
3)
(
3.00)
($
0
0.30
3)
$
0
($ 3.00)
$
0.30
Chapter 5 Formatting Worksheets
Text
3
-3
.3
@
3
-3
.3
67
Numbers formatted with @, the text number format, are left-aligned.
Creating Custom Number Formats
If none of the built-in number formats has what you need, you can define custom
number formats. Each custom number format can have as many as four sections: one
for positive numbers, one for negative numbers, one for zeros, and one for text. Each
section is optional; the sections are separated by semicolons. The following example
shows a custom number format.
#,###;(#,###);0;"Error: Entry must be numeric"
➤ To define a custom number format:
1. Select the cells for which you want to create the custom number format.
2. Select Format > Cells and select the Number tab, if necessary.
3. Select a category for the custom number format from the Category list.
4. In the Number Format text box, type a custom number format built from the
custom number format characters described below.
5. Click OK.
Custom Number Format Symbols
The following table lists the number format symbols you can use in a custom number
format string.
Format Symbol
Description
General
Displays the number in General format.
0
Digit placeholder. If the number contains fewer digits than the format
contains placeholders, the number is padded with 0’s. If there are more
digits to the right of the decimal than there are placeholders, the decimal
portion is rounded to the number of places specified by the placeholders.
If there are more digits to the left of the decimal than there are
placeholders, the extra digits are retained.
#
Digit placeholder. This placeholder functions the same as the 0
placeholder except the number is not padded with 0’s if the number
contains fewer digits than the format contains placeholders.
?
Digit placeholder. This placeholder functions the same as the 0
placeholder except that spaces are used to pad the digits.
68
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
Format Symbol
Description
. (period)
Decimal point. Determines how many digits (0’s or #’s) are displayed on
either side of the decimal point. If the format contains only #’s left of the
decimal point, numbers less than 1 begin with a decimal point. If the
format contains 0’s left of the decimal point, numbers less than 1 begin
with a 0 left of the decimal point.
%
Displays the number as a percentage. The number is multiplied by 100
and the % character is appended.
, (comma)
Thousands separator. If the format contains commas separated by #'s or
0's, the number is displayed with commas separating thousands. A
comma following a placeholder scales the number by a thousand. For
example, the format 0 scales the number by 1000 (10,000 would be
displayed as 10).
E- E+ e- e+
Displays the number as scientific notation. If the format contains a
scientific notation symbol to the left of a 0 or # placeholder, the number
is displayed in scientific notation and an E or an e is added. The number
of 0 and # placeholders to the right of the decimal determines the number
of digits in the exponent. E- and e- place a minus sign by negative
exponents. E+ and e+ place a minus sign by negative exponents and a
plus sign by positive exponents.
$ - + / ( ) : space
Displays that character. To display a character other than those listed,
precede the character with a back slash (\) or enclose the character in
double quotation marks (" "). You can also use the slash (/) for fraction
formats.
\
Displays the next character. The backslash is not displayed. You can also
display a character or string of characters by surrounding the characters
with double quotation marks (" ").
The backslash is inserted automatically for the following characters:
! ^ & ‘ (left quote) ’(right quote) ~ { } = < >
* (asterisk)
Repeats the next character until the width of the column is filled. You
cannot have more than one asterisk in each format section.
_ (underline)
Skips the width of the next character. For example, to make negative
numbers surrounded by parentheses align with positive numbers, you can
include the format _) after positive numbers to skip the width of the
parenthesis.
"text"
Displays the text inside the quotation marks.
@
Text placeholder. If the cell contains text, the text replaces the @ format
character.
m
Month number. Displays the month as digits without leading zeros (e.g.,
1-12). When used with h or hh formats, represents minutes.
Chapter 5 Formatting Worksheets
69
Format Symbol
Description
mm
Month number. Displays the month as digits with leading zeros (e.g., 0112). When used with the h or hh formats, represents minutes.
mmm
Month abbreviation. Displays the month as a three-letter abbreviation
(e.g., Jan-Dec).
mmmm
Month name. Displays the month as a full name (e.g., JanuaryDecember).
mmmmm
Month abbreviation. Displays the first letter of the month’s name (e.g., JD).
d
Day number. Displays the day as digits with no leading zero (e.g., 1-2).
dd
Day number. Displays the day as digits with leading zeros (e.g., 01-02).
ddd
Day abbreviation. Displays the day as an abbreviation (e.g., Sun-Sat).
dddd
Day name. Displays the day as a full name (e.g., Sunday-Saturday).
yy
Year number. Displays the year as a two-digit number (e.g., 00-99).
yyyy
Year number. Displays the year as a four-digit number (e.g., 1900-2078).
g
If you are using a Japanese locale, this displays the era symbol as a Latin
letter.
gg
If you are using a Japanese locale, this displays the first character of an
era name.
ggg
If you are using a Japanese locale, this displays the full era name.
e
If you are using a Japanese locale, this displays the full era year.
ee
If you are using a Japanese locale, this displays the full era year with a
leading 0.
h
Hour number. Displays the hour as a number without leading zeros (e.g.,
1-23). If the format contains one of the AM or PM formats, the hour is
based on a 12-hour clock. Otherwise, it is based on a 24-hour clock.
hh
Hour number. Displays the hour as a number with leading zeros (e.g., 0123). If the format contains one of the AM or PM formats, the hour is
based on a 12-hour clock. Otherwise, it is based on a 24-hour clock.
m
Minute number. Displays the minute as a number without leading zeros
(e.g., 0-59) when it appears immediately after the h or hh symbol.
Otherwise, it is interpreted as a month number.
mm
Minute number. Displays the minute as a number with leading zeros
(e.g., 00-59) when it appears immediately after the h or hh symbol.
Otherwise, it is interpreted as a month number.
s
Second number without leading zeros (e.g., 0-59).
70
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
Format Symbol
Description
ss
Second number with leading zeros (e.g., 00-59).
AM/PM, am/pm,
A/P, a/p
12-hour time. Displays time using a 12-hour clock. Displays AM, am, A,
or a for times between midnight and noon; displays PM, pm, P, or p for
times between noon and midnight.
[h]
Total number of hours.
[m]
Total number of minutes.
[s]
Total number of seconds.
s.0, s.00, s.000
Second number, including fractional part, without leading zeros.
ss.0, ss.00, ss.000
Second number, including fractional part, with leading zeros.
[Black]
Displays cell text in black.
[Blue]
Displays cell text in blue.
[Cyan]
Displays cell text in cyan.
[Green]
Displays cell text in green.
[Magenta]
Displays cell text in magenta.
[Red]
Displays cell text in red.
[White]
Displays cell text in white.
[Yellow]
Displays cell text in yellow.
[Colorn]
Displays cell text using the corresponding color in the color palette. n is
a color in the color palette.
[conditional value]
Using the conditional value brackets [ ], you can designate a different
condition for each of the four format sections (positive numbers, negative
numbers, zeros, and text). For example, you might want positive numbers
displayed in black, negative numbers in red, and zeros in blue. The
following string formats a number for these conditions:
[>0][Black]General; [<0][Red]General; [Blue]General
Chapter 5 Formatting Worksheets
Example Custom Number Formats
The following table shows some examples of custom number formats and numbers
displayed using the custom number formats.
Format
Cell Data
Display
#.##
123.456
123.46
0.2
.2
#.0#
#,##0"CR";#,##0"DR";0
123.456
123.46
123
123.0
1234.567
1,235CR
0
0
-123.45
123DR
#,
10000
10
"Sales="0.0
123.45
Sales=123.5
-123.45
-Sales=123.5
"X="0.0;"x="-0.0
-12.34
x=-12.3
$* #,##0.00;$* -#,##0.00
1234.567
$ 1,234.57
-12.34
$ -12.34
000-00-0000
123456789
123-45-6789
"Cust. No." 0000
1234
Cust. No. 1234
;;;
Anything
(Not Displayed)
"The End"
123.45
The End
-123.45
-The End
text
text
m-d-yy
2/3/94
2-3-94
mm dd yy
2/3/94
02 03 94
mmm d, yy
2/3/94
Feb 3, 94
mmmm d, yyyy
2/3/94
February 3, 1994
d mmmm yyyy
2/3/94
3 February 1994
hh"h" mm"m"
1:32 AM
01h 32m
h.mm AM/PM
14:56
2.56 PM
hhmm "hours"
3:15
0315 hours
71
72
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
Formatting Fonts
The Workbook Designer gives you a fast, easy way to apply different fonts, font sizes,
styles, and colors to the text in cells.
➤ To change the font, font size, style, and/or color of text in a cell or cells:
1. Select the cell or cells.
2. Choose the Format > Cells option and click the Font tab, if necessary. The Format
Cells Font tab appears, as illustrated below.
The fonts installed on
your system will appear
here.
Click Automatic to set
the text to your system’s
window text color.
These style settings may
not be available for all
fonts.
Text in the active cell appears here. The appearance of the sample text changes as you choose
different formatting options.
3. Choose a font by clicking on the options in the Fonts list box.
4. Choose a font style by clicking on the options in the Font Style list box.
5. Choose a font size by clicking on the options in the Size list box.
6. To make the text in the selected cell(s) appear with strikeout lines through it,
check the Strikeout box. To underline the text in the selected cell(s), check the
Underline box.
7. Choose a color for the text by clicking on that color in the color palette.
8. Click OK.
Note To change the color of the text in the selected cell(s), you can also use the Font
Color button on the Formatting toolbar.
Chapter 5 Formatting Worksheets
73
Aligning Cell Data
Formula One for Java allows you to specify how data is aligned within a cell. The
standard alignment places text along the left edge of the cell and numbers along the
right edge of the cell. Logical and error values are centered.
➤ To align data in cells:
1. Select the cells in which you want to align the contents.
2. Select Format > Cells and select the Alignment tab, shown below.
3. Specify the horizontal and vertical alignment of data in the selected cells using
the Horizontal and Vertical lists.
4. Check the Wrap Text check box to wrap long strings of data to multiple lines of
data within the cell.
5. Click OK.
Changing Row Height and Column Width
You can set the width of columns and the height of rows using menu commands or
click and drag actions.
Setting Default Row Height and Column Width
Formula One for Java provides menu commands that allow you to define the default
row height and default column width for your entire worksheet. This section describes
how to define these default settings.
74
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
➤ To define the default row height of a worksheet:
1. Select Format > Row > Default Height to display the Default Row Height dialog
box, shown below.
To instruct Formula One for Java to automatically adjust the height
of rows based on the values in the selected cells, select the Auto
option button.
2. Select the Custom option button to define the default height of rows.
3. Enter a custom setting for the row height in the Custom text box.
4. Select inches or centimeters from the Units drop-down list.
5. Click OK.
➤ To define the default column width of a worksheet:
1. Select Format > Column > Default Width to display the Default Column Width
dialog box, shown in the following illustration.
The column width can be based on number of characters,
centimeters, or inches.
2. Enter a default width for columns
3. Select a unit from the Units drop-down list.
4. Click OK.
Sizing Rows and Columns Using Menu Commands
You can set the width of selected columns and the height of selected rows using menu
commands. This section describes the commands that allow you to perform these
functions.
➤ To set the row height of a selection:
1. Select the cell(s) for which you want to set the height.
2. Select Format > Row > Height to display the Row Height dialog box, shown
below.
Chapter 5 Formatting Worksheets
75
For Formula One for Java to automatically adjust the height of rows
based on the values in the selected cells, click here.
Click here to display the Default Row Height dialog box.
Click here to use the default settings.
3. Select the Custom option button to define a custom row height for the selected
rows.
4. Enter a custom setting for the row height in the Custom text box.
5. Select inches or centimeters from the Units drop-down list.
6. Click OK.
➤ To set the column width of a selection:
1. Select the cell(s) for which you want to set the width.
2. Select Format > Column > Width to display the Column Width dialog box, shown
below.
To use default settings, click here.
Click here to display the Default Row Height dialog box.
The column width can be based on number of characters,
centimeters, or inches.
3. Enter a custom width for the selected columns.
4. Select a unit from the Units drop-down list.
5. Click OK.
➤ To widen a column to match the width of text in that column:
1. Select the cell that contains the text that you want the column width to match.
You may also select an entire column to make the column width match the
longest text in that column.
2. Select Format > Column > Autofit Selection.
Formula One for Java automatically widens the column to fit the text in the selection.
76
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
Sizing Rows and Columns Using Click and Drag
When you position the pointer on the right edge of a column heading or the bottom
edge of a row heading, the pointer changes to a double arrow to indicate that the row
or column can be resized. Click and drag to resize the column or row.
When the double arrow appears, click and drag to widen
column A.
You can select multiple rows or columns and resize them simultaneously by clicking
and dragging, as shown below.
Select multiple columns...
...drag the doublearrow...
...and all four columns
are simultaneously
sized.
Automatically Sizing Rows and Columns
You can automatically adjust the height of all cells in a row to accommodate the
largest font size in the row. You can also automatically adjust the width of all cells in a
column to accommodate the largest entry in that column.
You can automatically size a selected group of columns or rows to match the size of
an existing row or column.
Chapter 5 Formatting Worksheets
77
➤ To automatically size a row or column:
■
Double-click on the double-arrow over the bottom border of the row header.
Double-click on the double-arrow over the right border of the column header.
➤ To match a row or column’s size to another row or column’s size:
1. Select the row(s) or column(s) you want to resize and the row or column whose
size you want to match.
2. Click the right border of the column header whose size you want to match. Click
the bottom border of the row header whose size you want to match.
3. The selected row(s) or column(s) are resized to match the size of the row or
column you clicked.
Freezing Panes
You can freeze rows and columns in a worksheet so that when you scroll through your
worksheet, the designated columns and rows are always visible. Frozen rows or
columns are called panes. The following illustration shows a worksheet with frozen
panes.
Column A is frozen in this worksheet. When you scroll the
worksheet horizontally, column A does not move.
After scrolling, column D is displayed next
to column A.
Before horizontal scrolling
After horizontal scrolling
You cannot edit data in frozen panes. You must perform any data editing in these
panes prior to freezing. If you try to select a cell in a frozen row or column, the entire
row or column is selected, just as if you had selected a row or column heading.
Data in frozen rows and columns cannot be edited.
When you try to select a cell in a frozen row or column, the
entire row or column is selected.
78
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
➤ To freeze horizontal panes:
1. Select a cell in column A in the row below where you want to freeze the panes.
2. Select Format > Freeze Panes.
All rows between the active cell and the top of the worksheet are frozen.
➤ To freeze vertical panes:
1. Select a cell in row 1 in the column to the right of where you want to freeze the
panes.
2. Select Format > Freeze Panes.
All columns between the active cell and the left edge of the worksheet are frozen.
➤ To unfreeze panes:
■
Select Format > Freeze Panes again to uncheck the menu command.
Applying Colors to Worksheets and Cells
You can apply colors to the worksheet as a whole, to individual cells in the worksheet,
and to the borders of cells and ranges. You can also apply patterns to cells. The
following sections describe how to apply colors to worksheets and cells.
Note All color dialogs in Formula One for Java use the same color palette. You can
change the colors that appear in the color palette. For information, see “Setting Up
the Color Palette” on page 22.
Setting the Worksheet Background Color
The Workbook Designer allows you to define a background color for a worksheet.
When you do this, all cells in the worksheet will have the same background color. You
may also define an extra color, which is used to fill the area around the worksheet
when a user scrolls to the right or bottom edge of the worksheet.
Note You may change the colors of individual cells using the Format Cells option. If
colors have been applied to individual cells using the Format Cells option, those
colors remain even after you change the worksheet background color. For
information, see “Setting Cell Fill Colors” on page 79.
➤ To define a background and extra color for your worksheet(s):
1. Select a worksheet or worksheets.
2. Choose the Format > Sheet > Properties option. Click the Color tab, shown below.
Chapter 5 Formatting Worksheets
79
Click here to make the worksheet
background the same color as your
system’s window background color.
Click here to make the extra color the
same color as your system’s default
control color.
3. Choose background and extra colors by clicking on the color in the color palette.
4. Click OK.
Setting Cell Fill Colors
You can fill individual cells or ranges of cells with different colors from the color
palette.
➤ To fill a cell or range of cells with colors:
1. Select the cell or range of cells.
2. Select Format > Cells to display the Format Cells dialog box. Click on the Fill
tab, shown below.
Click here to apply the
worksheet background
color to the selected
cell(s).
The Automatic buttons
apply your system’s
window background color
to the fill or pattern of the
selected cell(s).
This sample shows how
the selected cell(s) look
with the color or pattern
applied. The active cell is
in the upper left corner,
along with the cells to its
right and below it.
3. Click Solid to apply a solid color from the Fill Color palette to the selected
cell(s).
80
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
4. Click Pattern and choose a pattern from the drop-down list to apply a pattern to
the selected cell(s). The pattern will be made up of a color from the Fill Color
palette and another color from the Pattern Color palette.
5. Click OK.
Note To change the fill color of the selected cell(s), you can also use the Fill Color
button on the Formatting toolbar.
Setting Cell Borders
You can apply borders to the top, bottom, left, and right sides of a cell. You may also
select a range of cells and place borders on different locations of the cells in that
range.
➤ To add borders to cells:
1. Select the cells you want to add borders to.
2. Select Format > Cells and select the Borders tab from the Format Cells dialog
box. The following illustration shows an example of the Borders tab.
Click Automatic to
return to the default
color.
Click here to apply the
same border to the top,
left, right, and bottom of
your selection. The box
is dimmed when
different borders apply
to the different
locations.
The Horizontal and
Vertical boxes apply line
styles and colors to
horizontal or vertical cell
borders in the interior of
your selection.
These four cells show how the selected cells will look when you press Apply or OK.
This thick contrasting bar shows a location where no style/color can be applied (usually on the
interior of single-cell selections), where more than one style/color has been applied, or where a
style/color and no style/color both apply. Note the box in the Border frame is correspondingly
dimmed for the Horizontal location.
3. Select a line style from the Style frame.
4. Select a border color from the color palette.
Chapter 5 Formatting Worksheets
81
5. Click in the appropriate boxes in the Border frame to specify the location of the
borders. The border location you choose will have the line style and/or border
color you selected, as shown in the sample.
6. Click Apply to apply the changes and leave the dialog box open; click OK to
apply the changes and close the dialog box.
Formatting Row and Column Headings
In addition to formatting worksheet cells, you can format many aspects of row and
column headings. Worksheet headings comprise three areas: the row headings, column
headings, and the box in the top left corner of the worksheet where the row and
column headings intersect.
Top left corner
Column headings
Row headings
Sizing Row and Column Headings
You can set the size of row and column headings and the top left corner.
➤ To change the height of column headings:
■
Click and drag the bottom edge of the top left corner.
➤ To change the width of row headings:
■
Click and drag the right edge of the top left corner.
When the pointer is
placed on an edge
of the top left
corner, it appears
as a double arrow.
A guide follows the pointer as you click and
drag the header border. The guide indicates
the placement of the header border when
you release the mouse button.
When you resize column headings,
you also set the height of the top
left corner. Likewise, when you
resize row headings, you set the
width of the top left corner.
82
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
Setting Row and Column Heading Text
Like other column and row heading attributes, the text displayed in headings cells can
be changed.
➤ To change the text for a row or column heading:
1. Double-click the heading you want to change. The Header Text dialog appears, as
shown below.
When you double-click a
heading, the Header Text
dialog box appears.
Enter the heading text. Press ENTER to start a new line of text.
2. Enter one or more lines of text to serve as the heading name.
3. Click OK.
The heading text is displayed, as shown below.
Chapter 5 Formatting Worksheets
83
Copying Formats
You may copy the formatting that has been applied to a cell and paste that formatting
to another cell. Formula One for Java pastes all the formatting that can be set in the
Format Cells dialog, including number formatting, alignment, fonts, borders, fill
colors, cell protection, and validation rules.
➤ To copy cell formats from cell to cell using the Format Painter:
1. Select the cell(s) whose formatting you want to copy.
2. Choose Edit > Copy Cell Format or click the Copy Format button.
3. Select the cell(s) where you want to paste the formatting.
Formula One for Java will format the selected cells with the copied formats.
Note Unlike most copy-and-paste operations, you don’t have to explicitly choose to
paste the formats when you use the Format Painter. Selecting the new cells tells
Formula One for Java that you want to paste the formats onto those cells.
Copying and pasting more than one cell format
Select two
cells with
different
formats.
Click the Copy Format button.
Select different cells.
The format copied from
the lefthand cell is
pasted into the lefthand
cells of the new
selection. The format
copied from the
righthand cell is pasted
into the righthand cells.
➤ To copy cell formats from cell to cell using Copy and Paste:
1. Select the cell(s) whose formatting you want to copy.
2. Choose Edit > Copy.
3. Select the cell(s) where you want to paste the formatting.
4. Choose Edit > Paste Special.
5. When the Paste Special dialog appears, uncheck all of the check boxes except for
Formats. Then click OK.
Formula One for Java will format the selected cells with the copied formats.
84
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
Formatting to Maximize Memory
If you select a row or column and apply a format to it, that format is applied to all
cells in the selected row or column. Formatting empty rows or columns does not use
memory because the format is merely attached to the row or column itself. However,
formatting individual empty cells or ranges is different. If you format a range of
empty cells, a group of formatted, empty cells is created. Each new formatted, empty
cell consumes memory.
Formatting entire rows and columns instead of individual cells and ranges will save
memory.
85
C H A P T E R
6
Editing Worksheets
Formula One for Java provides a variety of ways to edit data in worksheets. This
chapter covers the following topics:
■
“Moving, Copying, and Pasting” on page 86
■
“Finding and Replacing Data” on page 90
■
“Inserting Cells, Rows, and Columns” on page 93
■
“Clearing and Deleting Cells, Rows, and Columns” on page 93
■
“Sorting Data in Worksheets” on page 94
86
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
Moving, Copying, and Pasting
You can copy, move, and paste data within and between worksheets and workbooks.
When you copy data from a cell in a worksheet, you copy more than just text.
Information stored in a worksheet includes many different types of data, including:
■
■
■
Formulas. The result of the formula establishes the value in a cell. Formulas are
displayed in the formula bar when the cell is active.
Values. The number or text displayed in a cell.
Formats. How the cells and values are displayed, such as color settings or
currency formatting applied to a number.
Using the Clipboards
Formula One for Java’s own internal clipboard allows you to copy freely between
worksheets and workbooks and maintain all types of data. However, when you copy
between Formula One for Java and other software packages using the system
clipboard, which stores only text and formatting information, you may lose cell
reference and other data.
Pasting Ranges
If you select a paste-to range, rather than a cell, as a paste area, Formula One for Java
behaves differently based on the size of the range selected. If you select a paste-to
range smaller than the copied range, only the cells that fit are pasted — no cells are
pasted outside the selected paste-to range. If you select a paste-to range larger than the
copied cells, Formula One for Java pastes multiple copies of the copied range in a tile
pattern to fill in the copy-to range.
Using Dragging to Move, Copy, and Paste
This section discusses how to:
■
copy a selection of cells to the right or down using dragging
■
drag-and-drop a selection to copy or move it
Chapter 6 Editing Worksheets
87
Using Dragging to Copy
Copy data in the active cell to the right or down by dragging the copy handle of the
active cell. The copy handle is the small square in the lower right corner of the active
cell. When you copy data using the copy handle, the pointer changes to a crosshair.
The following illustrations show how to copy by dragging.
Click on and drag the copy
handle that appears in the
lower right corner of the
active cell.
The content of the active
cell (whether it’s text, a
number value, a formula,
etc.) is copied to the
selected cells.
If you select more than one
cell and drag the copy
handle . . .
. . . the content of the
selected cells is
automatically filled into
the range of cells you
drag over.
You can also copy a selected range in a worksheet. If an autofill list is defined for the
data in the range, the data is copied using the autofill list, as shown in the following
illustration. For more information on autofill lists, see “Using Autofill Lists” on page
54.
In this illustration, the cells
below the range are filled
with the data from the autofill
list when the copy handle is
dragged downward.
The copy handle was
dragged to cell A7.
Note You cannot drag to copy cells and ranges if the Fill Ranges by Dragging
checkbox is unchecked on the Edit tab of the Format Sheet dialog. For more
information, see “Controlling Worksheet Usage” on page 31.
Using Drag-and-Drop to Move or Copy
The following steps describe how to move or copy a selection using Formula One for
Java’s drag-and-drop.
88
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
➤ To move or copy a selection using drag-and-drop:
1. Select the cells that contain the data or object you want to move or copy.
2. Position the pointer on the border of the selection.
3. Move the selection by holding down the mouse button and dragging-anddropping the selection to the new location. You can also copy the selection by
holding down the CTRL key and dragging-and-dropping the selection to the new
location. An outline of the selection moves as you drag the pointer.
Original selection
Note that the cursor changes when
over border of selection.
When you drag-and-drop a
selection border, the entire
highlighted area moves to the
new location.
4. When the pointer is at the new location, release the mouse button.
A copy of the original selection remains in place if you hold down the CTRL key.
Note You cannot drag and drop to copy cells and ranges if the Move Ranges by
Dragging checkbox is unchecked on the Edit tab of the Format Sheet dialog. For
more information, see “Controlling Worksheet Usage” on page 31.
Using The Toolbar to Move, Copy, and Paste
➤ To move or copy cell data using the toolbar:
1. Select the cells that you want to cut or copy.
2. Click on the cut
or the copy
3. Select the new location.
4. Click on the paste
button.
button.
Chapter 6 Editing Worksheets
89
➤ To copy formatting from a cell or range and apply that formatting to another
cell or range:
1. Select the cells whose format you want to copy.
2. Click on the copy format
button.
3. Click on the cell or cell range where you want to apply the formatting.
Using Menu Commands to Move, Copy, and Paste
Use menu commands to handle copying and moving if the original and the new
locations are far apart on the same worksheet or you are moving selections between
workbooks, worksheets, or applications. Also use menu commands when you don’t
want to paste all cell attributes to the new location. Using menu commands, Formula
One for Java also allows you to choose whether to paste formulas, values, and
formats. Formula One for Java allows you to copy formatting from a cell or range and
apply that formatting to another cell or range.
This section describes how to use menu commands to:
■
move or copy data from cell(s) to cell(s)
■
copy formatting from cell(s) to cell(s)
■
paste individual attributes of a selection to another location.
➤ To move or copy all attributes of a selection:
1. Select the cells that you want to cut or copy.
2. Select Edit > Cut to cut the selection; Edit > Copy to copy the selection.
3. Select the upper left cell of the range in which you want to move or paste the
selection.
4. Select Edit > Paste.
The selection that was copied or cut is pasted with all cell attributes.
90
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
➤ To paste formulas, values, and/or formats:
1. Select the cells that you want to cut or copy.
2. Select Edit > Cut to cut the selection; Edit > Copy to copy the selection.
3. Select the upper left cell of the area or highlight a range where you want to paste
the copied cell formulas, values, and/or formats.
4. Select Edit > Paste Special.
5. The Paste Special dialog box is displayed as shown in the following illustration:
Check the check boxes for the attributes you want to paste.
You may check more than one.
6. Click in the checkboxes for the attributes you want to paste.
7. Click OK.
➤ To copy only the formatting of a selection and apply it to a cell or range:
1. Select the cells that contain the formatting that you want to apply.
2. Select Edit > Copy Cell Format.
3. Select the cell or range to which you want to apply the formatting.
The formatting is applied.
Finding and Replacing Data
Formula One for Java allows you to find and replace data within the active worksheet.
If you wish to locate a particular string of data in a worksheet, formula, or value, you
can use the Find dialog box. If you wish to search for data in Formula One for Java
worksheet and replace it with other data, you have the option of using the Replace
dialog box.
Note Formula One for Java only finds or replaces strings (values, text, and
formulas). You cannot find or replace cell formatting.
Chapter 6 Editing Worksheets
91
➤ To display the Find dialog box in the Workbook Designer:
1. Invoke the Workbook Designer.
2. Choose Edit > Find.
The Find dialog box appears.
➤ To display the Replace dialog box in the Workbook Designer:
1. Invoke the Workbook Designer.
2. Choose Edit > Replace or click on Replace with the Find dialog box open.
The Replace dialog box appears.
3. The notes in the following table describe each text box and button in the find and
replace dialog boxes and explain their use.
Find What text box
This is the search string you
want to find or find and
replace.
Replace With text box
Enter the search string you wish to locate. You may enter
values, text, or formulas.
Enter the information you want in the replacement string.
This is the replacement string You may enter values, text, or formulas.
you want to replace the search
string.
92
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
Find Next button
Clicking this button makes the cell that contains the next
matching text string the active cell. After using the mouse to
This button finds the next
occurrence of the search string click the button once, you may use ALT + F or the space bar
instead of clicking on the button to find other occurrences of
in the Find What text box.
your text string.
Close button
This button closes the dialog
box.
Replace button
Initially, this button adds the
Replace With text box and
Replace All button.
Replace All button
This button allows you to
replace all occurrences of the
search string with the
replacement string.
Search drop down list
The dialog box will also close if you press Enter before
clicking the Find Next button.
Click the Replace button or ALT+R or SPACEBAR to
replace each occurrence of the search string with the
replacement string.
Click this button or press ALT+A to replace all occurrences
of the search string with the replacement string.
■
This list allows you to choose
to search by rows or by
columns.
■
Look In drop down list
This list allows you to choose
to search in values only or
formulas only.
Match Case button
Matches upper and lowercase
letters
Find Entire Cells Only
button
Only finds cells that contain the
entire text string and nothing
else.
■
■
By Rows. Setting Search to By Rows means rows are
searched successively by row from the active cell to the
bottom of the spreadsheet, then from the top row to the
active cell.
By Columns. Setting Search to By Columns means
columns are searched successively by column from the
active cell to the rightmost column, then from the leftmost
column to the active cell.
Values. Setting Look In to Values means only search
strings in values (not the text of formulas) will be found.
Formulas. Setting Look in to Formulas means only
search strings found in the text of formulas are searched
for the matching text string.
Click this button to find only strings with matching upper
and lowercase letters. A search for Fin will not find fin.
Click this button to find only cells that contain the entire
search string, no more, no less. A search for Fin will not find
Finland.
Chapter 6 Editing Worksheets
93
Note You can view and load other worksheets and workbooks while the Find/Replace
dialog boxes are active, but the Find and Replace functions only operate on the
worksheet that was active at the time Find or Replace was invoked.
Inserting Cells, Rows, and Columns
➤ To insert cells:
1. Select a range of cells in the location and size of the range that you want to insert.
The cells selected will be moved directly above, below, to the left, or to the right
of the new cells.
2. Select Insert > Cells to display the Insert dialog box.
3. Select an Insert option button to specify where you want the displaced rows,
columns, or cells to shift.
4. Click OK.
➤ To insert rows or columns:
1. Select the number of rows or columns you want to add.
2. Select Insert > Rows to insert rows. Select Insert > Columns to insert columns.
Rows are added directly below the selected rows. Columns are added immediately to
the right of the selected columns.
Clearing and Deleting Cells, Rows, and Columns
Deleting cells removes the cells and shifts the surrounding data to fill the space.
Clearing cells leaves the cells in place but deletes any data or formatting in them.
➤ To delete cells:
1. Select the cells, rows, or columns you want to delete.
2. Select Edit > Delete to display the Delete dialog box.
3. Select a Delete option button to specify a direction you want the surrounding
rows, columns, or cells to shift.
4. Click OK.
94
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
➤ To clear cells:
1. Select the cells, rows, or columns you want to clear.
2. Choose one of the following, depending on what you want to clear from the cells:
Select Edit > Clear > Contents to clear the values and formulas, but leave the
formats.
Select Edit > Clear > Formats to clear the cell formats, but leave the values and
formulas.
Select Edit > Clear > All to clear the formulas, values, and formats.
3. Click OK.
Sorting Data in Worksheets
You can sort data in a worksheet and specify the keys by which the data is sorted.
➤ To sort data:
1. Select the cells that you want to sort.
2. Choose Edit > Sort.
3. The Sort dialog box is displayed as shown in the following illustration:
Use this dropdown list to select the key for which you want to specify a
key reference. Data is first sorted by Key 1, Key 2, Key 3, and so on.
Use this dropdown list to specify the column or row to use for sorting
with the Key specified in the Key dropdown list.
4. Select the Rows option button to specify that the selection be sorted by rows.
Alternatively, select the Columns option button to specify that the selection be
sorted by columns.
5. To specify the first row or column you want to sort by, select Key 1 from the Keys
list.
6. Select the row or column you want the selection to be sorted by from the
Reference list.
7. Select the Ascending or Descending option button to specify an ascending or
Descending sort order.
Chapter 6 Editing Worksheets
95
8. To specify the second row or column you want to sort by, select Key 2 from the
Keys list, then repeat steps 6 and 7.
You may specify as many sort keys as there are rows or columns in your
selection.
9. Click OK.
Note Worksheets treat each cell as independent data, not as part of individual
“records” as a database does. This is true even if your data was imported from a
database where data was stored in records. If you have data stored in record form that
you import into a worksheet and want to sort by record, be sure to select all of the
data in the records before using the sort feature.
Sort Example
The following example shows how to use two sort keys to determine the sort order of
multi-column data.
Original data
This data, originally organized by
date, is sorted with the following keys:
Key 1
Column 1
Ascending
Key 2
Column 2
Descending
Sorted data
The resulting sort shows the data
sorted by the first key, column 1.
When two items in column 1 are the
same, the system goes to the second
sort key, column 2, to determine the
order to arrange the data.
Tidestone
97
C H A P T E R
7
Working With Graphical Objects
Formula One for Java provides the ability to create graphical objects in a worksheet.
You can create arcs, lines, ovals, polygons, rectangles, push buttons, check boxes, and
dropdown list boxes. You can also insert pictures. As with other worksheet elements,
Formula One for Java provides a wide range of options for formatting and
manipulating the appearance of the graphical objects you create.
This chapter discusses the following topics:
■
“Creating Graphical Objects” on page 98
■
“Selecting Graphical Objects” on page 99
■
“Specifying Graphical Object Options” on page 99
■
“Identifying and Naming Graphical Objects” on page 108
■
“Moving, Sizing, and Arranging Graphical Objects” on page 109
■
“Deleting Graphical Objects” on page 111
■
“Graphical Objects and Microsoft Excel” on page 111
Charts are a special form of graphical object. Creating and formatting charts is
discussed in several chapters beginning with “Getting Started With Charts” on page
125.
98
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
Creating Graphical Objects
The Workbook Designer toolbar contains tools that allow you to create and edit
graphical objects. You may also use the Insert menu.
Creating polygons is different than creating other graphical objects. See “Creating
Polygons” on page 98.
➤ To create a graphical object:
1. In the Drawing toolbar, click the button for the graphical object you want to
create. Or use menu commands:
Choose Insert > Drawing Object and click the name of the object.
Choose Insert > Forms Object and choose the name of the object.
Choose Insert > Picture Object to draw a picture placeholder.
2. The pointer appears as a small crosshair when positioned in the worksheet.
Position it at the point where you want to begin drawing.
3. Click and drag to create the graphical object. An outline of the graphical object
you are creating appears and moves as you drag the mouse.
4. Release the mouse button to set the graphical object in place.
After choosing one of the Insert menu options for drawing objects, you may choose
not to draw the object by pressing CTRL + E or choosing Insert > Cancel Insert
Object.
Note When creating a graphical object, press ALT while you click and drag to align
the graphical object to the cell grid.
Creating Polygons
Creating polygons is slightly different than creating other graphical objects because
you must specify the shape of the polygon as you create it.
➤ To create a polygon:
1. In the Drawing toolbar, click the Polygon button. Or choose Insert > Drawing
Object > Polygon.
2. The pointer appears as a small crosshair when positioned in the worksheet.
Position it where you want one of the points of the polygon to be.
3. To create straight lines, click on each corner of the polygon in turn. An outline of
the polygon appears as you click and move the mouse.
4. To create curved lines, click and drag. An outline of the polygon appears as you
drag the mouse. You may combine straight and curved lines by clicking without
dragging and clicking with dragging.
5. To finish, click on the starting point of the polygon or double-click anywhere in
the worksheet. Formula One for Java closes up the polygon and selects it.
Chapter 7 Working With Graphical Objects
99
Selecting Graphical Objects
Selecting graphical objects is as simple as pointing and clicking. You must select an
object before you can format, move, or size it. When you draw a new graphical object,
Formula One for Java automatically selects it so you can format it immediately.
➤ To select a graphical object:
1. Position the pointer on the graphical object you want to select.
The pointer appears as an arrow when positioned on a graphical object.
2. Hold down the CTRL key and click the graphical object.
When the graphical object is selected, selection handles appear at the edges of the
bounding box that surrounds the graphical object.
Unselected oval
Selected oval
To select multiple graphical objects, press CTRL + SHIFT as you select the graphical
objects. You can also select Edit > Select All Objects to select all the graphical objects
in an active worksheet.
Specifying Graphical Object Options
Many elements of graphical objects can be formatted using the Format Object dialog
box. The following options are discussed in this section:
■
“Specifying Line Options” on page 100
■
“Specifying Arrow Options” on page 101
■
“Specifying Fill Options” on page 102
■
“Specifying Dropdown List Box Options” on page 102
■
“Specifying Check Box Options” on page 104
■
“Specifying Button Options” on page 106
■
“Specifying Polygon Options” on page 107
■
“Specifying Picture Options” on page 107
100
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
Specifying Line Options
The Format Object dialog box allows you to choose a color for lines and for the
outlines of arcs, polygons, ovals, and rectangles.
➤ To choose a color for lines and graphical object outlines:
1. Select the line, arc, polygon, oval, or rectangle you want to change.
2. Select Format > Object to display the Format Object dialog box.
3. Click the Line Style tab, shown below.
Click here to apply the color set by your
operating system for line objects
Click here to hide the line.
Click here to make a solid (non-dash) line of the
color selected in the palette.
Click here to make a dashed line of the color
selected in the palette. Choose the style of
dashes from the drop-down listbox.
If you chose the Solid or Dash option, you may
choose a color for your line by clicking on a color
in the palette.
A sample line showing the color, dash option,
and weight you chose appears here.
If you chose the Solid or Dash option, you can make the line a specific weight by typing in a value. Or choose a
value by clicking the up and down buttons. The higher the line weight, the thicker the line.
4. Click Apply to view your changes or OK to accept your changes.
Chapter 7 Working With Graphical Objects
Specifying Arrow Options
The Format Object dialog box allows you to put arrowheads on the last-drawn
endpoint of line graphical objects. You may also choose the style and size of
arrowheads.
➤ To add an arrow to a line and specify the arrow size and style:
1. Select the line you want to add an arrow to.
2. Select Format > Object to display the Format Object dialog box.
3. Click the Arrows tab, shown below.
Choose an arrow style:
hollow
filled
Choose the length and width of the arrow.
4. Click Apply to see your changes or OK to accept them.
Formula One for Java will put the arrow with the formatting you chose on the lastdrawn endpoint of the selected line. The arrow color corresponds to the line color.
101
102
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
Specifying Fill Options
After you create an arc, oval, polygon, or rectangle, the Format Object dialog box
allows you to fill that object with the color, pattern, or gradient fill of your choice.
➤ To set a fill for an arc, oval, polygon, or rectangle:
1. Select the arc, oval, polygon, or rectangle.
2. Select Format > Object to display the Format Object dialog box.
3. Click the Fill tab, shown below.
These frame titles change depending on
whether Solid, Pattern, or Gradient is selected.
Click here to fill the object
with the preset system
color.
Click here to let the color of
the object below the
selected one show through.
Click here to fill the
selected object with the
color in the lefthand
palette.
Click here to fill the
selected object with the
pattern you choose in the
drop-down box. Choose a
background color from the
lefthand palette and a
pattern color from the
righthand palette.
A sample of the fill color, pattern, or gradient you selected will appear here.
Click here to fill the selected object with the gradient you choose from the drop-down
box. Choose the starting color from the lefthand palette and the ending color from
the righthand palette.
4. Click Apply to see your changes or OK to accept them.
Specifying Dropdown List Box Options
Dropdown list boxes let you give the user a particular set of values to choose from.
The selected value then appears in a cell linked to the list box. List boxes can be used
to establish a value required in one or more of the workbook’s formulas.
For example, a workbook that calculates a mortgage payment schedule might include
a behind-the-scenes worksheet that calculates payments based on the interest rate of
your choice. A front-end worksheet might include a dropdown list box that lets users
choose the interest rate, as well as cells displaying the calculated payments.
When you add a dropdown list box to your worksheet, you can set or change the cell it
references, specify whether text or a value should appear in the cell, and define the list
of selections from which you can choose in the list. You must type the list of
Chapter 7 Working With Graphical Objects
103
selections into a dialog box; you cannot make the list box display the contents of a
range of cells on the worksheet.
For users to choose an item in a dropdown list box, the list box itself cannot be
selected and the pointer must be in normal worksheet editing mode.
When you link a cell to a list box, from then on the contents of that cell are controlled
by the list box. The list box will overwrite any formula you enter in that cell. You may,
however, enter one of the list box values in the referenced cell, and that value will then
display in the list box. For example, if you enter 0 in the cell, a list box that references
that cell displays its first item.
➤ To set or edit dropdown list box items:
1. Select a dropdown list box.
2. Select Format > Object to display the Format Object dialog box.
3. Select the Options tab, shown below.
Enter a reference to any cell in any
worksheet in the workbook. This cell will
display the results of the dropdown list box
selection.
Enter or edit the list of items contained by
the dropdown list box. Separate the items
with semicolons.
When this is checked, the dropdown list box item will appear in its assigned cell exactly as it appears in this
dialog box. When this is not checked, the system will return 0 when the first list box item is selected, 1 when
the second item is selected, etc.
4. Click OK.
The following illustration shows the results.
104
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
When you select
“South” in the list
box, the text for
South is displayed
in cell D2.
Specifying Check Box Options
Check boxes let you solicit a yes/no response from the user. The user’s choice appears
as a TRUE or FALSE entry in a cell linked to the check box. Check boxes can be used
to turn on or off certain workbook formula calculations.
For example, a budgeting workbook might contain a behind-the-scenes worksheet that
calculates future monthly costs based on the household’s current budget. There could
be two sets of formulas: basic ones and ones that adjust for inflation. A front-end
worksheet could include a check box called Adjust for Inflation. When the user
checks that box, the inflation formula set is used; when the user leaves the box unchecked, the other formula set is used.
When you add a check box to your worksheet, you can specify its caption and the cell
to link it to on the worksheet.
To set the value of a check box, the check box itself cannot be selected and the pointer
must be in normal worksheet editing mode.
When you link a cell to a check box, from then on the contents of that cell are
controlled by the check box. The check box will overwrite any formula you enter in
that cell. You may, however, enter TRUE or any number in the referenced cell to
check the check box. Enter FALSE or 0 in the referenced cell to un-check the check
box.
Chapter 7 Working With Graphical Objects
105
➤ To edit check box options:
1. Select a check box.
2. Select Format > Object to display the Format Object dialog box.
3. Select the Options tab, shown below.
This text will appear on the check box object.
Enter a reference to any cell in any worksheet in
the workbook. This cell will display TRUE when the
check box is checked, FALSE when the check box
is unchecked.
4. Click Apply or OK.
The following illustration shows the results.
When “Compound
Interest” is
checked, TRUE is
returned in cell C1.
106
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
Specifying Button Options
Buttons let you link snippets of Java code to the worksheet in order to perform a
specific task. For example, you might create Java code that displays a custom dialog
box when the button is pressed. Or a button might be coded to print the worksheet,
change to a different worksheet, etc.
Buttons require custom Java code except in the situation described in “Using Buttons
to Link to URLs in Applets” on page 106. In the Workbook Designer, you can set the
text displayed on the button.
➤ To edit button text:
1. Select the button.
2. Select Format > Object to display the Format Object dialog box.
3. Select the Options tab, shown below.
This text will appear on the button.
4. Click OK.
Using Buttons to Link to URLs in Applets
Buttons require custom Java code except in one situation: When the button appears on
a worksheet displayed as part of an applet in a browser, you can enter a URL in the
button name text box and the browser will link to that URL when the button is
pressed. Note that this only works with applets.
➤ To link a button on a worksheet in an applet to a URL:
1. Select the button.
2. Select Format > Object to display the Format Object dialog box.
3. Select the Name tab, shown below.
Enter the URL.
4. Click OK.
Chapter 7 Working With Graphical Objects
107
Specifying Polygon Options
You can edit polygons in either of two editing modes: normal and polygon point
editing.
■
■
Normal polygon editing allows you to resize and move polygons. You cannot
change the shape of the polygon in this mode.
Polygon point editing allows you to reposition polygon points, thus changing the
shape of the polygon.
To use normal polygon editing, click the polygon and click and drag the selection
handles. If you want to use polygon point editing, click the polygon point editing tool
and click and drag the selection handles of the polygon. You may also select the
polygon and choose Edit > Polygon Points. The following illustration shows a
selected polygon when normal polygon editing and polygon point editing modes are
enabled.
When normal polygon editing mode is enabled, the selection
handles appear at the edges of the bounding box that surrounds
the polygon.
In this mode, the polygon can be resized and moved.
When polygon point editing mode is enabled, a selection handle
appears at each point along the border of the polygon.
In this mode, the polygon points can be repositioned and the
polygon can be moved.
➤ To reshape a polygon:
1. Select the polygon to be reshaped.
2. Make certain that polygon point editing is enabled.
When polygon point editing is enabled, selection handles appear at each point
along the border of the selected polygon.
3. Position the pointer on the polygon point that you want to move.
4. Click the point and drag the mouse. An outline of the lines adjoining the point
move as you drag the polygon point.
5. Release the mouse button to place the point at its new location.
Specifying Picture Options
When you insert a picture using the Insert > Picture Object menu command, you are
really inserting a placeholder for the picture. The picture placeholder looks like a
rectangle. To insert the picture into the placeholder you’ve drawn, you have to tell
Formula One for Java the name of the picture file you want to insert.
You may insert pictures of file types JPG or JPEG and GIF. You must know the file’s
URL in order to insert it.
108
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
➤ To insert a picture file in a picture object:
1. Select the picture object.
2. Select Format > Object to display the Format Object dialog box.
3. Select the Options tab, shown below.
4. Enter the URL identifier for the picture you want to insert.
5. Click OK.
The image contained in the file of the name you entered will appear in the picture
placeholder. The image will be scaled to fit the dimensions of the placeholder. If the
shape of the placeholder doesn’t correspond to the shape of the image, the image may
be stretched out of proportion. You may resize the image by dragging its selection
handles.
Identifying and Naming Graphical Objects
When you create a graphical object, Formula One for Java assigns the graphical object
an identification number. Many methods require a graphical object identification
number to tell Formula One for Java which graphical object to operate on.
Identifying Graphical Objects
➤ To determine a graphical object’s identification number:
1. Select the graphical object.
2. Select Format > Object to display the Format Object dialog box.
3. Select the Name tab, shown below.
The Name tab displays the
identification number for the selected
graphical object.
Chapter 7 Working With Graphical Objects
109
4. Click OK.
Formula One for Java maintains a list of graphical objects in each worksheet within a
workbook. The order of the graphical objects in that list is determined by the order in
which graphical objects are drawn in the worksheet. Formula One for Java places new
graphical objects on top of older ones. The farther to the back a graphical object is
placed or drawn, the higher the graphical object is placed in a worksheet’s object list;
the closer to the front a graphical object is placed or drawn, the lower the graphical
object is placed in the list.
Note When you use the Format > Bring To Front and Format > Send To Back
commands, you alter the order of the graphical object list maintained by the
worksheet.
Naming Graphical Objects
Graphical objects can be named after they are created. Graphical object names do not
take the place of graphical object identification numbers. Rather, graphical object
names are used as a supplement to identification numbers, making it easier to track
and manipulate graphical objects.
➤ To name a graphical object:
1. Select the graphical object you want to name.
2. Select Format > Object to display the Format Object dialog box.
3. Click the Name tab.
4. Enter the name to assign to the graphical object in the Name for Object text box.
5. Click OK.
Moving, Sizing, and Arranging Graphical Objects
After creating a graphical object, you can change its position and size. You may move
a graphical object to a different position on the worksheet, and you may move it in
front of or in back of other graphical objects.
Note Graphical objects are anchored to the cells upon which they appear. If you
shrink or expand the row height or column width of any of the cells behind a
graphical object, the object will shrink or expand accordingly.
Moving Graphical Objects
➤ To move a graphical object:
1. Select the graphical object.
2. Position the pointer anywhere in the area occupied by the graphical object. The
pointer appears as an arrow.
110
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
3. Click and drag to move the graphical object. An outline of the graphical object
moves with the pointer as you drag the mouse.
4. Release the mouse to set the graphical object at its new position.
Note When moving or resizing a graphical object, you can align it to the worksheet
grid by pressing ALT as you click and drag.
Sizing Graphical Objects
➤ To size a graphical object:
1. Select the graphical object.
2. Position the pointer on one of the selection handles. The pointer appears as a twoheaded arrow, indicating the direction in which the graphical object can be
resized.
3. Click and drag to resize the graphical object. An outline of the graphical object
moves with the pointer as you drag the mouse.
4. Release the mouse to set the graphical object at its new size.
Note When moving or resizing a graphical object, you can align it to the worksheet
grid by pressing ALT as you click and drag.
Arranging Graphical Objects
When you have multiple graphical objects on a worksheet, they appear to be drawn on
the same plane. However, when two graphical objects overlap, the later-drawn object
covers the previously drawn object. You can change the order of graphical object
layering in a worksheet by sending a graphical object behind other graphical objects
or bringing a graphical object to the front of other graphical objects.
All graphical objects appear in front of the cells on the worksheet. You cannot place
cells in front of graphical objects.
➤ To arrange overlapping graphical objects:
1. Select the graphical object you want to move.
2. Select Format > Bring to Front or Format > Send to Back to move the graphical
object in the direction you specify.
Note The Bring to Front and Send to Back commands allow you to move a graphical
object to the front or back of all other graphical objects. You cannot move an object
behind another object but in front of a third object.
Chapter 7 Working With Graphical Objects
111
Deleting Graphical Objects
➤ To delete a graphical object or objects:
1. Select the object or objects.
2. Press DELETE, choose Edit > Delete Object, or choose Edit > Cut.
The object or objects are deleted.
Graphical Objects and Microsoft Excel
Formula One for Java’s control objects (buttons, check boxes, and dropdown list
boxes) are incompatible with Microsoft Excel’s. Control objects in a file will be
deleted if you import the file from Excel to Formula One for Java or export the file
from Formula One for Java to Excel.
Formula One for Java’s picture objects are also incompatible with Microsoft Excel’s.
Files containing picture objects in either application can be opened in the other
application, but the picture objects will be deleted.
Formula One for Java’s drawing objects (arcs, lines, ovals, rectangles, and polygons)
are compatible with Microsoft Excel. However, some of the fill patterns and line
widths may not appear as you originally set them when you export a file from
Formula One for Java to Excel.
Tidestone
113
C H A P T E R
8
Printing Worksheets
Formula One for Java provides several options for printing worksheets and setting
printing specifications. This chapter covers:
■
“Printing Worksheets” on page 114
■
“Overview of Worksheet Print Options” on page 114
■
“Specifying Print Areas” on page 116
■
“Specifying Print Titles” on page 116
■
“Specifying Page Breaks” on page 117
■
“Specifying Page Print Options” on page 118
■
“Specifying Sheet Print Options” on page 119
■
“Specifying Margin Print Options” on page 120
■
“Specifying Headers and Footers” on page 121
114
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
Printing Worksheets
➤ To print the active worksheet:
1. Select File > Print or press the Print button to display the standard Print dialog
box for your operating environment.
2. Make any necessary adjustments to the settings and click OK.
The worksheet will be printed with its current print option settings. See “Overview of
Worksheet Print Options” on page 114 for information on changing those settings.
Overview of Worksheet Print Options
Formula One for Java’s many printing options are available in several menus and
dialog boxes. The quick guide below will help you determine where to look for
information about the print option you want to set.
Quick Guide to Print Options
The print options are listed in alphabetical order.
Print option
How to set that option
Black and white
printing
■
Select File > Page Setup and click the Sheet
tab.
■
Check No Color, then click OK.
Center the
printout on the
page
■
Select File > Page Setup and click the Margins “Specifying Margin
tab.
Print Options” on page
120
Choose values in the Center frame, then click
OK.
Color printing
■
Select File > Page Setup and click the Sheet
tab.
■
Un-check No Color, then click OK.
■
Select File > Page Setup and click the Headers
& Footers tab.
■
Enter codes in the Footer frame, then click OK.
■
Select File > Page Setup and click the Sheet
tab.
■
Check or uncheck Grid Lines, then click OK.
■
Select File > Page Setup and click the Headers
& Footers tab.
■
Enter codes in the Header frame, then click
OK.
Footer
Grid lines, print
or hide
Header
■
For more information
“Specifying Sheet Print
Options” on page 119
“Specifying Sheet Print
Options” on page 119
“Specifying Headers
and Footers” on page
121
“Specifying Sheet Print
Options” on page 119
“Specifying Headers
and Footers” on page
121
Chapter 8 Printing Worksheets
Print option
How to set that option
Margins
■
■
115
For more information
Select File > Page Setup and click the Margins “Specifying Margin
tab.
Print Options” on page
120
Choose values in the Margins frame, then click
OK.
■
Select the cell below and to the right of where
you want the page break.
■
Select Insert > Page Break.
Page numbering,
add a page
number
■
Select File > Page Setup and click the Headers
& Footers tab.
■
Enter page number and other formatting codes
in the Header or Footer frame, then click OK.
Page numbering,
choose the
starting number
■
Select File > Page Setup and click the Page tab. “Specifying Page Print
Options” on page 118
Choose values in the Page Numbering frame,
then click OK.
Page order
■
Select File > Page Setup and click the Sheet
tab.
■
Choose values in the Page Order frame, then
click OK.
■
Select File > Page Setup and click the Page tab. “Specifying Page Print
Options” on page 118
Choose the paper size and click OK.
Page breaks
Paper size
■
■
Print area
Print orientation
“Specifying Page
Breaks” on page 117
“Specifying Headers
and Footers” on page
121
“Specifying Sheet Print
Options” on page 119
■
Select the cells you want to appear on the
printout.
■
Select File > Print Area > Set Print Area.
■
Select File > Page Setup and click the Page tab. “Specifying Page Print
Options” on page 118
Choose Portrait or Landscape and click OK.
■
“Specifying Print
Areas” on page 116
■
Select the row(s) or column(s) that should
appear as print titles.
■
Select File > Print Titles > Set Print Titles.
Row and/or
column
headings, print
or hide
■
Select File > Page Setup and click the Sheet
tab.
■
Check or uncheck Row Heading and/or
Column Heading, then click OK.
Scaling
■
Select File > Page Setup and click the Page tab. “Specifying Page Print
Options” on page 118
Choose values in the Scaling frame, then click
OK.
Print titles
■
“Specifying Print
Titles” on page 116
“Specifying Sheet Print
Options” on page 119
116
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
Specifying Print Areas
Formula One for Java prints all the data on the active worksheet unless you specify the
range(s) you want to print by setting the print area.
➤ To set the print area:
1. Select the range or ranges to print.
You can select multiple ranges to print; the ranges do not have to be adjacent. For
example, a print area could be comprised of two ranges, A1:D4 and F5:I8.
2. Select File > Print Area > Set Print Area.
The print area is set.
➤ To remove a previously set print area:
■
Select File > Print Area > Clear Print Area.
All data on the worksheet will appear on any printout.
Specifying Print Titles
You can specify that a particular row(s) or column(s) appear as titles on each page of
your worksheet. If you select a row, it is printed at the top of each page. If you select a
column, it is printed at the left edge of each page. You can select multiple rows or
columns, but they must be adjacent.
You cannot select both rows and columns to be print titles. It must be either rows or
columns.
Print titles may be separate ranges from print areas or they may overlap. No matter
what size or shape the print area, if you set print titles, the print title cells will appear
above or to the left of the print area cells.
You can have the worksheet row and column headings (that is, the gray boxes that
contain the row and column letters and numbers) appear as titles on printed copies by
changing the settings in the Sheet Print Options dialog box. For information, see
“Specifying Sheet Print Options” on page 119.
➤ To set print titles:
1. Select the rows or columns to use as print titles. You must select the entire row.
2. Select File > Print Titles > Set Print Titles.
The print titles are set.
➤ To remove previously set print titles:
■
Select File > Print Titles > Clear Print Titles.
No titles will appear on any printouts.
Chapter 8 Printing Worksheets
117
Specifying Page Breaks
In the Workbook Designer, you can specify both horizontal and vertical page breaks in
a worksheet. Page breaks are always placed along the border of the active cell.
■
Horizontal (row) page breaks are placed along the top edge of the active cell.
■
Vertical (column) page breaks are placed along the left edge of the active cell.
➤ To set page breaks:
1. Select the cell below and/or to the right of where you want the page to break.
2. Select Insert > Page Break.
➤ To remove page breaks:
1. To remove a horizontal page break, select a cell below the break. To remove a
vertical page break, select a cell to the right of the break.
2. Select Insert > Remove Page Break.
118
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
Specifying Page Print Options
The Page tab of the Page Setup dialog box allows you to set print options for the
active worksheet. This tab allows you to:
■
choose portrait or landscape orientation
■
fit your work on a certain number of printed pages
■
choose a paper size
■
restart page numbering
➤ To set the page print options for the active worksheet:
1. Select File > Page Setup, then click on the Page tab, shown below.
Choose the portrait or landscape printing
orientation.
To print the worksheet larger or smaller than
actual size, enter the size percentage value (it
must be between 10 and 400).
To force the printout to fit onto a certain number
of pages wide, enter the number of pages here.
To force the printout to fit onto a certain number
of pages tall, enter the number of pages here.
Choose from the variety of paper size options.
To start worksheet page numbering at a number
other than 1, click here.
Enter the page number you want to appear on
the first page of the printout. Subsequent pages
will be numbered sequentially after this number.
2. Click Apply to view your changes or OK to accept them.
Chapter 8 Printing Worksheets
Specifying Sheet Print Options
The Sheet tab of the Page Setup dialog box allows you to set print options for your
worksheet. This tab allows you to:
■
specify whether grid lines, colors, or row and column headings appear on the
printout
■
indicate page order for printing
➤ To set the sheet print options for the active worksheet:
1. Select File > Page Setup, then click on the Sheet tab, shown below.
Check this box to print gridlines, or
uncheck it to hide them.
Check this box to print colors as black and
white, or uncheck it to enable color printing.
Check this box to print the row headings, or
uncheck it to hide them.
Check this box to print the column
headings, or uncheck it to hide them.
Click here to specify that all the
data in the uppermost rows
should print before data in the
lower rows.
Click here to specify that all the
data in the leftmost columns
should print before the data in
columns farther out.
2. Click Apply to view your changes or OK to accept them.
119
120
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
Specifying Margin Print Options
The Margins tab of the Page Setup dialog box allows you to set margins for your
worksheet in the units of your choice. It also allows you to center your worksheet
horizontally or vertically.
➤ To set margins and page centering for the active worksheet:
1. Select File > Page Setup, then click the Margins tab, shown below.
Enter the distance between the top edge of the page
and the header.
Enter the distance between the bottom edge of the
page and the footer.
Choose the units of measure.
To center the worksheet horizontally and/or
vertically, check one or both of these checkboxes.
2. Click Apply to see your changes or OK to accept your changes.
Note When you enter margin lengths, be aware that if the header or footer margin is
larger than the top or bottom margin, the header or footer will overwrite the
worksheet data on the page.
Chapter 8 Printing Worksheets
121
Specifying Headers and Footers
The Headers & Footers tab of the Page Setup dialog box allows you to create headers
and footers, which are lines of text printed at the top and bottom of each page. You
type in the header and footer text. You can use special content codes to insert
worksheet-specific information like page numbers, the name of the workbook, the
current date and time, etc. You can also use formatting codes to format and align the
text.
➤ To create headers and/or footers for the active worksheet:
1. Select File > Page Setup and click the Headers & Footers tab, shown below.
The default header code prints the
worksheet name.
The default footer code prints the
page number.
2. Enter text and formatting codes in the Header and Footer boxes. See below for
information on special formatting codes.
3. When you finish, click OK.
Formatting Codes for Headers and Footers
Formatting codes allow you to format and align the header and/or footer text and to
insert worksheet-specific information.
There are three types of formatting codes: alignment codes, font codes, and worksheet
codes. They must be entered in that order. If you put the codes in the wrong order,
Formula One for Java may ignore some of them. Enter codes in upper or lower case
and separate them with a space.
122
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
The following tables list the special formatting codes.
Alignment Codes
Description
&L
Left-aligns the characters that follow.
&C
Centers the characters that follow.
&R
Right-aligns the characters that follow.
By default, headers and footers are centered unless you use the &L or &R code.
Font Codes
Description
&B
Use a bold font.
&I
Use an italic font.
&U
Underline the text.
&S
Strike out the text.
&"fontname"
Use the specified font.
&nn
Use the specified font size (must be a two-digit number)
Worksheet Codes
Description
&D
Prints the current date.
&T
Prints the current time.
&F
Prints the workbook name.
&A
Prints the worksheet name.
&P
Prints the page number.
&P+number
Prints the page number plus number.
&P-number
Prints the page number minus number.
&&
Prints an ampersand.
&N
Prints the total number of pages in the document.
123
P A R T
3
Charting
Tidestone
125
C H A P T E R
9
Getting Started With Charts
This chapter explains how to create charts, do basic chart formatting, print, and delete
charts. If your chart is simple, this may be the only charting chapter you need to read.
The following topics are covered.
■
“Creating a Chart” on page 126
■
“Changing the Chart Type” on page 126
■
“About Chart Titles” on page 129
■
“About Chart Legends” on page 131
■
“Resizing and Moving a Chart” on page 132
■
“Printing a Chart” on page 133
■
“Deleting a Chart” on page 133
Other basic charting topics not documented in this chapter can be found at:
■
“Chart Concepts and Techniques” on page 135, which gives more advanced
information about how the charting software works
■
“Guide to Individual Chart Types” on page 151, which describes each chart type
in detail
126
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
Creating a Chart
➤ To create a chart:
1. Select the cells on the worksheet that contain the data you want to chart. These
cells are called the data range. It may contain numbers and headings. Headings
must appear in the top row and/or the left column of the selection. These headings
will automatically appear as labels on the chart.
Sample chart data
For more information about the data range, see “Working With Chart Data
Ranges” on page 145.
2. Select Insert > Chart or click the Chart button:
3. Draw the chart onto the worksheet by clicking and dragging from the chart’s
upper left corner to its lower right corner, as if you were drawing a rectangle. You
can change the chart’s size and position later.
4. Formula One for Java creates a column chart that shows the data you selected.
The column chart is the default chart type; you can change it later. The chart’s
legend appears at the right side.
Default chart created from
the sample chart data
above.
Note how column and row
headings appear on the
chart’s axis and legend.
Changing the Chart Type
The chart type determines what it will look like: whether the data is displayed as
columns, lines, pie slices, etc.
➤ To change the chart type:
1. Click anywhere on the worksheet to deselect the chart object.
2. Right-click on the chart to bring up the context menu.
3. Choose Chart Type.
Chapter 9 Getting Started With Charts
127
4. The Chart Type dialog appears, as shown below.
Formula One for Java’s chart types are listed
here. Choose one.
5. Click Apply to see what your data looks like in the chart type you chose, or OK to
finalize your choice.
List of Chart Types
Area charts show each cell’s data as a point on a horizontal line
that is the upper boundary of an area that reaches down to the X
axis. Use area charts to represent accumulation of value over a
period of time. An area chart focuses on the magnitude of change
rather than the rate of change.
For information, see “About Area Charts” on page 152.
Bar charts show each cell’s data as a horizontal bar. Bar charts
compare items to each other and are particularly effective at
showing large changes from one category to another. They are
equivalent to column charts turned on their side.
For information, see “About Column and Bar Charts” on page 158.
Bubble charts show two groups of numbers as a series of XY
coordinates. In addition, a third set of numbers indicates the size of
each data point, or bubble. Bubble charts can be used to show the
relatedness of data as well as the relative importance of each data
point. They are like XY (Scatter) charts with an added third
dimension.
For information, see “About Bubble Charts” on page 153.
128
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
Column charts show each cell’s data as a vertical column. Column
charts compare items to each other and are particularly effective at
showing large changes from one category to another.
For information, see “About Column and Bar Charts” on page 158.
Combination charts let you display different types of data in
different ways on the same chart. You may combine columns,
lines, areas, and steps. Use them to visually highlight the
differences between different sets of data.
For information, see “About Combination Charts” on page 160.
Doughnut charts show each cell’s data as a slice of a doughnut.
The chart may contain one or more doughnuts, arranged one inside
the other. Doughnut charts show the relationship of parts to the
whole of several sets of data.
For information, see “About Doughnut Charts” on page 163.
Line charts show each cell’s data as a point on a line. They
illuminate trends or changes in data over a period of time. They
emphasize time flow and rate of change rather than amount of
change.
For information, see “About Line Charts” on page 166.
Pie charts show each cell’s data as a slice of a pie. The chart may
contain one or more pies. Pie charts show the relationship of parts
to the whole.
For information, see “About Pie Charts” on page 169.
Step charts show each cell’s data as a stair step in a series of stair
steps. Like area charts, they show data accumulation, only they
illustrate changes between data points as distinct stair steps rather
than as continuous points. Use them to compare items that do not
show trends.
For information, see “About Step Charts” on page 171.
XY (Scatter) charts plot two groups of numbers as a series of XY
coordinates. XY charts show the relationship between two sets of
data. If the data points form the shape of a line, the two sets of data
are related.
For information, see “About XY (Scatter) Charts” on page 175.
Chapter 9 Getting Started With Charts
129
About Chart Titles
Unlike the axis labels and legend text, the chart’s title is not taken from the data range
on the worksheet. Instead, you enter it in a dialog box. After you enter a chart title, the
title element appears on the chart.
The title element is the
text and space
contained within this
set of selection
handles.
Adding or Editing a Chart Title
➤ To add or edit a chart title:
1. Right-click on the chart to bring up the context menu.
2. Choose Title. The Format Title dialog appears.
3. Choose the Options tab. The dialog box shown below appears.
Enter the text of the
title. To enter more than
one line of title text,
press ENTER.
4. Click Apply to see your changes or OK to accept your changes. The title appears
above your chart.
Formula One for Java will automatically wrap the text of the title if it is too long to fit
in the space.
130
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
Aligning Chart Title Text
After you enter a multi-line title, you can adjust the alignment of the text within the
title’s selection handles.
➤ To adjust the title text alignment:
1. Right-click on the chart to bring up the context menu.
2. Choose Title. The Format Title dialog appears.
3. Choose the Alignment tab, shown below.
Align the text
horizontally within its
selection handles.
Align the text vertically
within its selection
handles.
4. Click Apply to see your changes or OK to accept your changes.
Other Title Formatting Options
To make this change...
See this section
Change the font
“Changing Fonts, Font Styles, and Font Colors” on page 219
Move the title
“Moving Chart Elements” on page 141
Add a background color
“Changing Fill Colors, Patterns, and Gradients” on page 223
Add an outline
“Changing Line Styles and Colors” on page 222
Chapter 9 Getting Started With Charts
131
About Chart Legends
A chart legend appears by default when you first create a chart. For most charts,
legends show the names and colors of each series of data. The legend text is taken
from the chart’s data range.
Chart legend
Adding or Moving a Legend
➤ To add or move a legend:
1. Right-click on the chart to bring up the context menu.
2. Choose Legend. The Format Legend dialog box will appear.
3. Choose the Options tab, shown below.
Un-check this box to
remove the legend.
Choose a position for
the legend. When you
select Bottom or Top,
the legend text will
usually be automatically
arranged in two or more
columns.
4. Click Apply to see your changes or OK to accept your changes.
You may also move a legend by clicking and dragging. For information, see “Moving
Chart Elements” on page 141.
132
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
Sizing a Legend
You may size the legend by selecting it and dragging its selection handles. Making a
legend longer adds extra space between the lines of text. Making it shorter cuts off
lines of text. Making a legend wider will arrange the legend text in multiple columns.
Shrinking the legend too far may cut off some of the legend’s text.
By dragging the legend’s selection handles, you can change its line
spacing and number of columns.
Changing the Legend Text
By default, the legend text is taken from the chart’s data range. You cannot select the
legend text and edit it directly in the legend. Instead, you change the text in the cells
on the chart’s data range that correspond to the legend entries. The legend will
automatically be updated to reflect the data range changes. For information, see
“Headings in the Data Range” on page 147 and “Editing Cells in the Data Range” on
page 146.
There are other, more complicated ways to automatically change what appears in the
legend. For information, see “Changing Chart’s Data Source for Series and Headings”
on page 184 and “Automatically Varying Data Point Colors” on page 227.
Other Legend Formatting Options
To make this change...
See this section
Change the legend font
“Changing Fonts, Font Styles, and Font Colors” on page 219
Add a background color
“Changing Fill Colors, Patterns, and Gradients” on page 223
Change the outline color
“Changing Line Styles and Colors” on page 222
Resizing and Moving a Chart
➤ To change the size or position of a chart:
1. Select the entire chart by holding down CTRL and clicking on the chart. Selection
handles will appear on the outside border of the chart.
2. Drag the selection handles to change the size or shape of the chart.
3. Hold down CTRL and drag on the body of the chart to move the chart to a new
position. You can also move the pointer to the edge of the chart until it turns into
a four-arrow cursor, then drag.
Chapter 9 Getting Started With Charts
133
Note Like other graphical objects, chart objects are anchored to the cells upon which
they appear. If you shrink or expand the row height or column width of any of the
cells behind the chart, the chart will shrink or expand accordingly.
For information on...
See this section
How resizing affects the chart’s elements
“Sizing Chart Elements” on page 141
Automatic chart layout settings
“Resetting Chart Formatting” on page 149
Printing a Chart
To print a chart, print the worksheet that the chart appears on. You cannot print a chart
separate from its worksheet.
For more information, see “Printing Worksheets” on page 113.
Deleting a Chart
➤ To delete a chart:
1. Select the entire chart by pressing CTRL while clicking on the chart. Selection
handles will appear on the outside border of the chart.
2. Press the DELETE key or choose Edit > Clear > All. The chart will disappear
from the worksheet.
Tidestone
135
C H A P T E R
1 0
Chart Concepts and Techniques
This chapter explains the basic concepts and techniques of charting. The following
topics are covered.
■
“Chart Elements” on page 136, which defines and describes the different chart
elements
■
“Selecting Chart Elements” on page 138
■
“Moving Chart Elements” on page 141
■
“Sizing Chart Elements” on page 141
■
“Using the Context Menu to Edit Charts” on page 142
■
“Charting Dialog Boxes” on page 143, which is a list of all the charting dialogs
and their tabs, along with explanations of what you can do with each tab
■
“Working With Chart Data Ranges” on page 145
■
“Resetting Chart Formatting” on page 149
Other basic charting topics not documented in this chapter can be found at:
■
“Getting Started With Charts” on page 125, which explains how to create charts
and do basic chart formatting
■
“Guide to Individual Chart Types” on page 151, which describes each chart type
in detail
136
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
Chart Elements
title
plot
data point
legend
The three bars representing Internet
sales form a series.
The darker bars representing In-store
sales form another series.
January, February, and March are categories.
The title is a text box you can place anywhere on the chart.
The plot is the area on the chart that displays the data in the chart type you choose.
A data point is one piece of data appearing on the chart. For most chart types, each
data point shows the value of the contents of one cell in the data range linked to the
chart.
A chart’s legend shows what kind of data is represented in the chart. By default, the
text that appears in the legend is taken from the chart’s data range.
Series are sets of related data. A chart can have one or more series. Each chart type
displays series differently. Often (but not always), series correspond to rows of data in
the data range.
Categories are “bins” into which the data from each series is sorted. Often (but not
always), categories correspond to columns of data in the data range.
For information on series and categories, see “Headings in the Data Range” on page
147 and “How Each Chart Type Displays Series and Categories” on page 149.
Chapter 10 Chart Concepts and Techniques
137
Y axis
marker
axis labels
grid line
drop line
Y axis title
data label
tick
X axis
X axis title
X axis labels
The Y axis is vertical on most charts (except for bar charts, where the Y axis is
horizontal). Because it displays values, the Y axis is also called the value axis. On XY
and bubble charts, both the X and Y axes are value axes.
The X axis is horizontal on most charts (except for bar charts, where the X axis is
vertical). On most charts, the X axis is called the category axis because it displays
category names.
Axis labels are words or numbers that mark the different portions of the axis. Value
axis labels are computed based on the data displayed in the chart. Category axis labels
are taken from the category headings entered in the chart’s data range.
Axis titles are words or phrases that describe the entire axis.
Markers identify data points. You can put markers on all data points in a series or on
only selected data points.
Grid lines are horizontal or vertical lines that extend from the axis ticks.
Drop lines are lines leading from a data point to the category axis. On large or
complex charts, drop lines help show which category a data point belongs to. Drop
lines are only available on line chart types.
Data labels identify individual data points. Data labels are a good way to emphasize or
explain a particular piece of data on the chart. Data labels can display the data point’s
category, its value, or text you enter yourself.
Ticks are short lines that mark off an axis into segments of equal size. On value axes,
axis labels are displayed on ticks. On category axes, axis labels are displayed between
ticks.
138
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
label line
highest price attained for that period
high-low line
open-close bar showing gain
open-close bar showing loss
lowest price attained for that period
study showing volume data
Label lines are lines leading from a data point to its data label.
High-low lines are used on stock charts to show the range of prices the stock
commanded over a period of time. High-low lines are available only on line chart
types.
Open-close bars are used on stock charts to show the stock’s price at market opening
and closing. You can color the bars differently to show whether the stock gained or
lost.
Studies are sub-charts that display below the main chart in the same plot area. Studies
share the same X axis and usually show similar data on a different scale. Stock charts
frequently display studies that show the volume of stocks traded. You can display one
or more studies on any chart that has axes.
Selecting Chart Elements
Like most graphical user interface software tools, Formula One for Java requires that
you select a chart element or the chart itself before you perform an action on the chart
or chart element.
To move, size, or delete the chart itself, select the chart.
To move or change aspects of individual chart elements, select the chart element. Only
one chart element can be selected at one time.
Note If the chart is selected, you are not allowed to select any of the chart elements.
Deselect the chart by clicking anywhere on the worksheet, off the chart. Then click
on the chart element of your choice.
Chapter 10 Chart Concepts and Techniques
139
Quick Guide to Selecting Chart Elements
This quick guide lists the selectable chart elements in alphabetical order, explains how
to select them, and shows what they look like when selected.
Axis
Click on the axis, axis labels,
axis title, or tick.
A selected axis has three selection handles
Chart
A selected chart has eight selection
handles.
CTRL + click on any part of
the chart.
Data label (individual)
A selected data label has eight selection handles.
Click the label. If the series is
selected, click again to select
just the label.
Data labels (series of)
Each data label in a selected
series of labels has two
selection handles.
Click a label in the series.
Data point
Click the data point. If the
entire series is selected, click
again.
Each chart type displays selected data points differently.
On a line or
XY series
On a bubble series
On a pie or
doughnut series
On a column or bar series
Drop lines
Click the line.
Grid lines
Click one of the grid lines.
You cannot select individual
grid lines.
High-low lines
Click one of the high-low
lines. You cannot select
individual high-low lines.
Selected drop lines each have one
selection handle in the center of the line.
Selected grid lines each have two selection
handles.
Selected high-low lines each have one
selection handle in the center of the line.
140
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
Label lines
Click the line.
Legend
Click the legend.
Open-close bars
Click the bar.
Plot
Click anywhere in the plot
area, but not on any particular
element. If another element is
selected, move the cursor
away from it and click again.
Series
Click an item in the series. If
a data point is selected, click
a different item in the series.
A selected label line has three selection
handles. You must select label lines one at
a time.
A selected legend has eight selection handles
Selected open-close bars have four
selection handles. To tell whether you have
selected the down bars or the up bars, see
if the values in the chart’s data range are
ascending or descending.
A selected plot has eight selection
handles.
Each chart type displays selected series differently.
A selected line or XY series
A selected
bubble series.
A selected pie or
doughnut series
A selected column or bar series
Selected area or step series are
surrounded by selection handles.
Title
Click the title.
A selected title has eight selection handles.
Chapter 10 Chart Concepts and Techniques
141
Moving Chart Elements
Most of the chart elements are automatically put in their positions by Formula One for
Java. However, you may move the following chart elements by selecting them and
dragging them to the new location.
Chart element
Notes on moving
Chart
You cannot move the chart off of the worksheet. For more information on
moving charts, see “Resizing and Moving a Chart” on page 132.
Data labels
(individual)
Data labels can overlap the plot, but the title and legend will overlap the data
label. You can create a manual data label and then drag it away from its data
point. You can use this feature to label an entire series or an entire pie, for
example, or to create a note at the bottom of the chart. For more
information, see “About Data Labels” on page 214.
Legend
The legend can overlap the title, plot, and data labels.
Plot
The title, legend, and data labels can all overlap the plot.
Title
The title can overlap the plot and data labels, but the legend will overlap the
title.
Sizing Chart Elements
Because most of the chart elements are automatically sized by Formula One for Java,
you cannot resize them. However, you may size the following chart elements by
selecting them and dragging one of the element’s selection handles.
Chart element
Notes on sizing
Chart
The plot, title, legend, and data labels will shrink or expand as you shrink or
expand the chart, but these elements will retain their relative positioning. For
more information on moving charts, see “Resizing and Moving a Chart” on
page 132.
Legend
Enlarging the legend adds extra space between the lines of text. Shrinking
the legend too far may cut off some of the legend’s text.
Plot
The data plotted on the grid will shrink or expand as you shrink or expand
the plot.
On very large charts, Formula One for Java displays all the ticks, grid lines, and axis
labels as specified in the Axis Format dialog box. However, on smaller charts,
Formula One for Java may drop elements that don’t fit. For more information, see
“Disappearing Axis Labels?” on page 198.
142
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
Using the Context Menu to Edit Charts
The chart context menu appears when you right-click on an area of the chart. You use
the context menu to invoke dialog boxes that let you edit different aspects of a chart’s
appearance.
The top menu item of the context menu changes depending on which chart element was
selected when you right-clicked.
The bottom five menu items are always available on the context menu.
To dismiss the context menu without choosing any of the menu options, click in
another area of the chart.
The Effect of Selection on the Context Menu
The Chart Type, Chart, Plot, Legend, and Title menu options are always available on
the context menu. Other menu options appear on the menu depending on which chart
element is selected. The following table shows which chart elements you can select in
order to invoke different menu options.
Selected chart element
Menu option available
Axis
Format Axis
Data label(s)
Format Data Labels
Data point(s)
Format Data Point
Drop lines
Format Drop Lines
Grid lines
Format Grid Lines
High-low lines
Format High-Low Lines
Label lines
Format Label Lines
Open-Close bars
Format Open-Close Bars
For information on how to select different chart elements, see “Selecting Chart
Elements” on page 138.
Problems With Clicking for the Context Menu
Since selecting requires a click of the mouse and invoking the menu requires another
click, it can be tricky to get the menu option you want. For example, if you want the
Format Series menu option, you must select a series, then right-click on the series to
invoke the menu. Often the second click changes your selection to a data point, and
the Format Data Point option becomes available instead of the Format Series option.
You can solve this problem by right-clicking to select the chart element you want. The
element will be selected and the menu will appear at the same time.
Chapter 10 Chart Concepts and Techniques
143
Charting Dialog Boxes
Formula One for Java’s charting dialog boxes are listed here in alphabetical order, as
well as the tabs that appear on each dialog and what information you can edit using
that tab.
Format Axis dialog
Line Style tab
Set a line style for the axis and set a color for the axis and its ticks.
Scale tab
Set how often ticks, labels, and grid lines appear. Set the maximum and
minimum values for a value axis. Reverse the order of categories or values.
Set axis intersection. Create a logarithmic axis.
Font tab
Set the font, font size, color, and style for axis labels and titles.
Number tab
Apply a number format to the axis labels.
Options tab
Create an axis title. Set display options for adjacent axes and for major and
minor grids and ticks.
Format Chart dialog
Fill Area tab
Set a background fill color, pattern, or gradient for the entire chart.
Line Style tab
Set a line style and color for the outline of the chart.
Font tab
Set the font, font size, color, and style for all the text on the chart.
Title tab
Enter the text of the chart title.
Plot tab
Set special characteristics for different types of charts.
Legend tab
Display or hide the legend and position a visible legend on the chart.
Options tab
Automatically reposition the chart’s plot, title, and legend. Remove all
formatting from a chart.
Format Data Labels dialog
Fill Area tab
Set a fill color, pattern, or gradient for the background of the data label(s).
Line Style tab
Set a line style and color for the outline of the data label(s).
Font tab
Set the font, font size, color, and style for the data label(s).
Number tab
Apply a number format to the data label(s).
Alignment tab
Align the data label(s) within the selection box(es).
Options tab
Align the data label selection box(es) to the corresponding data point(s).
Enter data label text.
Format Data Point dialog
Fill Area tab
Set a fill color, pattern, or gradient for the background of the data point.
144
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
Format Data Point dialog
Line Style tab
Set a line style and color for the outline of the data point.
Markers tab
Set a size, style, and foreground and background colors for markers. This tab
is available only for line and XY charts and for combination charts with a line
series.
Data Labels tab Create a data label for the selected data point.
Format Drop Lines dialog
Line Style tab
Set a line style and color for the drop lines.
Format Grid Lines dialog
Line Style tab
Set a line style and color for the grid lines.
Format High-Low Lines dialog
Line Style tab
Set a line style and color for the high-low lines.
Format Label Lines dialog
Line Style tab
Set a line style and color for the label line(s).
Format Legend dialog
Fill Area tab
Set a fill color, pattern, or gradient for the background of the legend.
Line Style tab
Set a line style and color for the outline of the legend.
Font tab
Set the font, font size, color, and style for the text in the legend.
Options tab
Display or hide the legend. Position the legend on the chart.
Format Open-Close Bars dialog
Fill Area tab
Set a fill color, pattern, or gradient for the background of the open or close
bars.
Line Style tab
Set a line style and color for the outline of the open or close bars.
Format Plot dialog
Fill Area tab
Set a fill color, pattern, or gradient for the background of the legend.
Line Style tab
Set a line style and color for the outline of the legend.
Axes tab
Create studies. Set display options for adjacent axes and for major and minor
grids and ticks for one or more of the chart’s axes. Set ratios for size of chart
and studies. This tab is not available for pie and doughnut charts.
Data Labels tab Create data labels for all the data points in the chart.
Options tab
Set special characteristics for different types of charts.
Chapter 10 Chart Concepts and Techniques
145
Format Series dialog
Fill Area tab
Set a fill color, pattern, or gradient for the background of all the data points in
the series. This tab is not available for line series.
Line Style tab
Set a line style and color for the outline of all the data points in the series.
Markers tab
Set a size, style, and foreground and background colors for markers. This tab
is available only for line and XY charts and for combination charts with a line
series.
Data Labels tab Create data labels for all the data points in the series.
Options tab
Rearrange the chart’s series. Plot the series on the second Y axis or on a
study. For combination charts, assign a series type. For pie and doughnut
charts, explode the slices.
Format Title dialog
Fill Area tab
Set a fill color, pattern, or gradient for the background of the title.
Line Style tab
Set a line style and color for the outline of the title.
Font tab
Set the font, font size, color, and style for the text in the title.
Alignment tab
Align the title text horizontally and vertically within its selection handles.
Options tab
Enter the text of the chart title.
Working With Chart Data Ranges
To create a chart, first select a range of cells on a Formula One for Java worksheet.
That range, called the data range, is linked to the chart. You may later redefine what
data is linked to that chart.
For information on how Formula One for Java interprets the data in a chart’s data
range, see “Anatomy of a Data Range” on page 145, “Headings in the Data Range” on
page 147, and “Editing Cells in the Data Range” on page 146.
For information on redefining the data that was originally linked to the chart, see
“Changing the Chart’s Data Source” on page 182.
Note Bubble, XY, and stock charts require the data in the data range to be organized
in a specified arrangement, otherwise the chart will not display the data properly. For
more information on bubble charts, see “About Bubble Charts” on page 153. For
more information on XY charts, see “About XY (Scatter) Charts” on page 175. For
more information on stock charts, see “About Stock Charts” on page 172.
Anatomy of a Data Range
The data range can contain headings, data, and a spaceholder cell.
Headings are text cells that are used as names for categories and series on the chart.
You do not have to enter headings, but if you do, they may only appear in the top row
and/or left-hand column of the data range.
146
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
Data are number cells that are used as data points on the chart. Numbers may fill the
entire data range if you choose not to enter headings.
The spaceholder cell is an empty cell in the top left corner of the data range. Use the
spaceholder cell only when the top row AND left-hand column of the data range
contain headings. The spaceholder cell tells Formula One for Java to use the data in
the first column as headings. If the upper left-hand cell contains text or numbers, the
cells in the leftmost column will be considered data cells and will be plotted on the
chart.
The spaceholder cell tells Formula One for Java to use the first column as headings, not data.
Headings may appear only in the first row and/or in the left-hand column.
Data cells should contain only
numbers.
If any cell in a non-heading row or column contains text, that text will be plotted as 0
on the chart. If any cell in a non-headings row or column is empty, no data point will
appear on the chart and the space reserved for that data point will be blank.
Note You create this kind of data range when you set up the chart for the first time.
After creating the chart, you may change the cells or ranges linked to each heading,
to each range, or to the entire chart. See “Changing the Chart’s Data Source” on page
182.
Editing Cells in the Data Range
When you change the contents of a cell in the data range, the chart is automatically
updated.
When the selected value is changed
in the chart’s data range...
...the chart is updated to
reflect that change.
Chapter 10 Chart Concepts and Techniques
147
Headings in the Data Range
By default, category headings in the data range are used as axis labels on the X
(category) axis. Series headings in the data range are used as series labels in the
chart’s legend. To change the category axis label text, change the contents of the
heading cell. Similarly, to change the text of the chart’s legend, change the contents of
the heading cell.
Series headings
appear on the
legend.
Category headings
appear as axis
labels on the
category axis.
When the data range has no headings, Formula One for Java draws a chart that uses
numbers for category and series names. By default, each category name will be a
number starting at 1 and Series 1, Series 2, etc. will appear in the legend.
Entering Heading Cells
Data range heading cells must contain text. If you want your heading to be a number,
either enclose it in quotation marks or precede it by a tick mark (').
Headings may only be entered in the top row and/or left-hand column of the data
range. Text entered in other cells of the data range is plotted as a zero value on the
chart. If you enter headings in both the top row and left-hand column, you must leave
the top-left cell in the range blank.
Note Pie charts, doughnut charts, and charts with varied data point colors display
category headings, not series headings, in the legend. For more information, see
“About Pie Charts” on page 169, “About Doughnut Charts” on page 163, or
“Automatically Varying Data Point Colors” on page 227.
Series and Categories in the Data Range
By default, the number of rows and columns in the data range determines how the
chart defines categories and series. Formula One for Java will follow the default
guidelines the first time it draws a chart based on the data range you select. Later, you
148
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
can change these default settings (see “Different Ways to Define Series and
Categories” below).
■
■
■
If there are more rows than columns, by default each row becomes a series and
each column becomes a category.
If there are more columns than rows, by default each column becomes a series and
each row becomes a category.
If there are an equal number of rows and columns, by default each row becomes a
series and each column becomes a category.
A rule of thumb: the charting software always tries to minimize the number of series
on a chart. It counts the number of rows and columns in the data range and assigns
series to the smaller of the two counts. As noted above, if the row and column counts
are equal, then by default each row becomes a series.
Note Pie and doughnut chart types use series and category data differently than the
other chart types. For more information on pie charts, see “About Pie Charts” on
page 169. For more information on doughnut charts, see “About Doughnut Charts”
on page 163.
Different Ways to Define Series and Categories
■
■
Change series to categories in order to reverse the way series and categories are
defined on the chart. For information on how to do this, see “Changing Chart
Series Into Categories” on page 181.
Change the data source to tell Formula One for Java exactly which cells to use as
which series data points. The data cells don’t have to be contiguous. You may also
redefine which cells are used as which headings. You may even disconnect the
chart from the worksheet and enter the data and headings yourself, in a dialog
box. For information, see “Changing the Chart’s Data Source” on page 182.
Chapter 10 Chart Concepts and Techniques
149
How Each Chart Type Displays Series and Categories
For most chart types, chart data is organized into series and categories that correspond
to rows and columns on the data range. Each chart type displays series and categories
differently.
Chart type
A series is displayed as...
A category is displayed as...
Area
A colored area
A point where the upper bounding lines bend
Bar
Bars of the same color
A group of bars, one from each series
Bubble
Bubbles of the same color
A bubble
Column
Columns of the same color
A group of columns, one from each series
One of four options:
Combination One of four options:
A group of columns, one from each series
Columns of the same color
A point where the lines bend
A line
A point where the upper bounding lines bend
An area
A set of platforms
A colored “staircase”
Doughnut
A doughnut
Doughnut slices of the same color
Line
A colored line
A point where the lines bend
Pie
A pie
Pie slices of the same color
Step
A colored “staircase”
A set of platforms, one from each staircase
XY
A colored line
A point where the line bends
For information on how to enter and identify series and categories in the chart’s data
range, see “Working With Chart Data Ranges” on page 145.
Resetting Chart Formatting
You can use the Undo and Redo toolbar buttons and menu options (on the Edit menu)
to reverse chart formatting actions. You can also use two special options for resetting a
chart’s layout to its defaults and for removing all formatting that has been applied to a
chart.
Note If you choose to reset the entire chart to its default formatting settings, Formula
One for Java will delete any formatting you have applied to that chart. To bring back
your formatting, use the Edit > Undo command or click the Undo button.
150
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
➤ To reset formatting for a chart:
1. Choose the Format Chart menu option from the context menu.
2. Click the Options tab, shown below.
.
These options affect
the chart’s layout and
formatting settings.
3. Check the Automatic Layout check box to return moved and/or sized chart
elements to appropriate sizes and positions for the chart size and shape. The title
will move to the center of the top of the chart, the legend will be sized
appropriately and placed at the location shown in the Options tab of the Format
Legend dialog box, and the plot will be moved and sized to take up the remaining
space.
Automatic Layout is automatically checked if you choose one of the Auto
Position options on the Options tab of the Format Legend dialog.
Click Apply to see your changes or OK to accept your changes.
4. Check the Reset entire chart to defaults check box to remove all formatting that
has been applied to a chart. When you check this box, your chart will be
converted to a column chart with no title or legend, like the one shown below.
A chart after being reset to its defaults.
5. Formula One for Java will confirm that you want to do this by displaying the
message “Resetting the chart will cause all formatting to be lost. Continue?”
Click OK to reset the chart and lose all formatting or Cancel to leave the chart as
it is.
151
C H A P T E R
1 1
Guide to Individual Chart Types
This chapter describes each chart type and explains issues related to that particular
chart type. The following topics are covered.
■
“About Area Charts,” page 152
■
“About Bubble Charts,” page 153
■
“About Column and Bar Charts,” page 158
■
“About Combination Charts,” page 160
■
“About Doughnut Charts,” page 163
■
“About Line Charts,” page 166
■
“About Pie Charts,” page 169
■
“About Step Charts,” page 171
■
“About Stock Charts,” page 172
■
“About XY (Scatter) Charts,” page 175
Other basic charting topics not documented in this chapter can be found at:
■
“Getting Started With Charts” on page 125, which explains how to create charts
and do basic chart formatting
■
“Chart Concepts and Techniques” on page 135, which gives more advanced
information about how the charting software works.
152
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
About Area Charts
Area charts show each piece of chart data as a point on a horizontal line that is the
upper boundary of an area that reaches down to the X axis. Use area charts to
emphasize the relative importance of values over a period of time. An area chart
focuses on the magnitude of change rather than the rate of change.
This area chart
shows the total
number of drivers of
both sexes in
different age
groups. The series
are stacked to show
the individual and
aggregate data.
A series of data appears as a colored area on an area chart. Each series has its own
color. Categories are represented by points where the upper bounding lines bend.
Special Notes About Area Charts
Selecting data points. You can’t select individual data points in area charts; you may
only select the whole area.
Edge of the plot is visible. Since the data points for each category are plotted in the
center of that category’s portion of the axis, an empty strip of the chart’s plot will be
visible on both sides of the chart.
Hidden data points. Depending on the chart’s data, it’s possible to inadvertently hide
some or all of the data points of one series behind another series. You can fix this
problem in several ways:
■
Rearrange the order of the series. For information, see “Changing the Order of
Chart Series” on page 186.
■
Stack the series. For information, see “Stacking Series of Data Points” on page
187.
■
Display each data point as a percent of the category total. For information, see
“Plotting Data Points as Percentages of the Category” on page 188.
Chapter 11 Guide to Individual Chart Types
153
About Bubble Charts
Bubble charts show two groups of numbers as a series of XY coordinates. A third set
of numbers indicates the size of each data point, or bubble. Bubble charts show the
relatedness of three different sets of values.
This chart shows the five
states in which the highest
number of fatal automobile
accidents occurred in 1996.
Grid lines extend from both
value axes in this chart.
Each bubble must have three pieces of data related to it: its X coordinate, its Y
coordinate, and its bubble size. Bubbles in one series are all the same color. You may
have more than one series of bubbles on a chart.
Bubble charts should be used when you want to compare three sets of data for each
series. If one or more of the three sets of data falls into categories in which you have
one entry per category (for example, a statistic that happens every year or for every
age group), that data is better served appearing as categories on a different type of
chart.
Creating Bubble Charts
Because the data for bubble charts is complex and can be arranged in various
configurations, Formula One for Java cannot create bubble charts automatically. It
needs user input to define how to interpret the data. To create a bubble chart, you first
create a “mock” chart using a sample data range. Then you bring up the Chart Data
tab to redefine how the data should be used in the chart.
154
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
➤ To create a bubble chart:
1. Set up the worksheet so that there are three sets of values for each bubble (the X
axis value, the Y axis value, and the bubble size). You can set up your data range
in any arrangement, even with non-contiguous cells. This is how the worksheet
was set up for the example chart.
2. To create the chart, select the cells in the chart’s data range. (Since you will later
define which cells should represent which areas, it doesn’t matter which cells you
select.) Click on the Chart button and draw the chart onto the worksheet. For
more information, see “Creating a Chart” on page 126.
3. Change the chart type to Bubble, as explained in “Changing the Chart Type” on
page 126.
The chart that appears will probably look odd, but you will fix it in the next steps.
4. CTRL + click on the chart to select it, then choose Format > Object. The Chart
Data tab of the Format Object dialog will appear.
5. For a bubble chart like the one in the example, which has only one color of bubble
and therefore only one series, delete all but one series by selecting unwanted
series and clicking the Delete button.
6. Select a series. Fill in the Name text box with the name you want to appear for
this color of bubble on the chart legend. You can enter the text of the name or a
cell reference pointing to the cell that contains the name.
Fill in the X Values, Y Values, and Sizes text boxes with range references that
refer to the appropriate ranges on the worksheet. (These range references should
include only numeric data, not heading or other text cells.)
For more information about options for filling in the Chart Data tab, see
“Changing the Chart’s Data Source” on page 182.
Here is how the Chart Data tab was filled in for the example chart.
Chapter 11 Guide to Individual Chart Types
155
7. For a bubble chart with more than one series, repeat step 6 for each series on the
chart.
8. Click Apply to view your changes or OK to accept your changes.
9. Finish formatting the chart using the context menu options.
Sizing All the Bubbles
Formula One for Java sizes the bubbles proportionally. To set the starting point for
sizing bubbles, Formula One for Java uses an internally computed default size. You
can increase or decrease this default size to increase or decrease the size of all of the
bubbles on the chart.
Default bubble size of 100
Bubble size of 50
Bubble size of 300
156
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
➤ To change the relative sizes of all the bubbles on the chart:
1. Select the Format Plot option from the context menu.
2. Click on the Options tab.
3. In the Bubble frame, enter a value from 0 to 300, representing a percentage of the
default bubble size.
4. Click Apply to see your changes or OK to accept your changes.
Labeling Bubbles by Size
A special data label formatting option for bubble charts allows you to display the
bubble sizes in data labels.
➤ To display data labels showing bubble sizes on a bubble chart series:
1. Select the series.
2. Select the Format Series option from the context menu.
3. Click on the Data Labels tab.
4. In the Type frame, select Show Bubble Sizes.
5. Click Apply to see your changes or OK to accept your changes.
Note The Data Labels tab also appears on the Format Plot and Format Data Point
dialogs. This allows you to apply data labels showing bubble sizes to all the series on
the plot or to just one selected data point. For more information, see “About Data
Labels” on page 214.
Special Notes About Bubble Charts
Overlapping bubbles. If two or more data points have similar X and Y values, the
bubbles may overlap, or one may be hidden behind another.
The third bubble is barely visible behind the large bubble.
When the chart’s data source rows are rearranged, the third
bubble is drawn on top of the large bubble.
If the overlapping bubbles are two different colors, they are from two different series.
You can fix the overlap by rearranging the order of the chart series. For information,
see “Changing the Order of Chart Series” on page 186.
If the overlapping bubbles are the same color, they are from the same series. You can
fix the overlap by rearranging the order of the rows in the chart’s data source on the
worksheet. Formula One for Java draws the bubbles in the order in which they appear
on the worksheet, with the data in the higher worksheet rows drawn first and the data
Chapter 11 Guide to Individual Chart Types
157
in the lower rows drawn on top of the earlier data. You can copy and paste the rows so
that the data for the hidden bubble now appears in the bottom row.
The hidden bubble should automatically appear on top of the other bubbles. For
information on copying and pasting worksheet cells, see “Moving, Copying, and
Pasting” on page 86.
Bubbles extending off the plot. If the bubble size of a bubble located near the edge of
the plot is large, part of that bubble may extend off the edge of the plot, as shown
below. You can fix this problem by adjusting the axis scale in the Scale tab of the
Format Axis dialog. For more information about adjusting axis scale, see “Changing
Axis Scale Settings” on page 194.
Changing the axis scale of the Y axis keeps the bubble from
extending off the top edge of the plot.
158
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
About Column and Bar Charts
Column charts show each cell’s data as a vertical column. Column charts are
particularly effective at showing large changes from one category to another.
This column chart
shows adults’ average
earnings in 1996 by the
amount of education
attained. Data labels
showing the value of
each data point are
displayed at the base
of each column.
Bar charts show each cell’s data as a horizontal bar. They are equivalent to column
charts turned on their side.
This bar chart shows the number of people in poverty
by age and year. The bars within the categories
overlap slightly because the bar gap ratio was set at
a negative number.
Setting Bar Spacing Options
Formula One for Java groups bars on bar and column charts together by category.
Each bar displayed in a particular category represents a data point from one series. By
default, the bars from different series touch one another within a category, but there is
space between categories, as shown in the example bar and column charts above.
Chapter 11 Guide to Individual Chart Types
159
You can change the spacing of the bars on any bar or column chart by using the X Gap
Ratio and Bar Gap Ratio options.
X Gap Ratio is the amount of space between categories of bars. By default it is set at
100, meaning that the space between categories is 100% of the width of a bar. You
may set it as large as 500, which would be five times larger than the default amount of
space, or as small as 0, which would mean the bars in adjacent categories would
touch.
Bar Gap Ratio is the amount of space between the bars in a category. By default it is
set at 0, meaning there is no space between the bars. Negative Bar Gap Ratio values
mean the bars will overlap, while positive values add space between the bars. You
may set it as large as 100, which would make the width of the space equal to the width
of the bars, or as small as 0, which would superimpose the bars in a category one on
top of the other.
Default bar spacing options: X gap ratio of 100, Bar Gap Ratio of 0.
X gap ratio of 300, Bar Gap Ratio of 0.
X gap ratio of 100, Bar Gap Ratio of 100.
X gap ratio of 0, Bar Gap Ratio of 0.
X gap ratio of 100, Bar Gap Ratio of -50.
➤ To set bar spacing for a bar or column chart:
1. Choose the Plot option from the context menu.
2. Click on the Options tab.
3. Enter a number between 1 and 500 for the X Gap Ratio. Enter a number between
-100 and 100 for the Bar Gap Ratio.
4. Click Apply to see your changes or OK to accept them.
160
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
Showing Bars as Lines
For charts that display a lot of data in a limited amount of space, you may want to
display a line instead of a bar.
➤ To display bars as lines on a bar or column chart:
1. Select the series you want to display as lines.
2. Choose the Format Series option from the context menu. Click the Options tab.
3. Check the Show Bar As Line option.
4. Click Apply to see your changes or OK to accept them.
About Combination Charts
Combination charts let you display different types of data in different ways on the
same chart. You may display columns, lines, areas, and steps all on the same
combination chart. Use them to visually highlight the differences between different
sets of data.
This chart shows how kindergarten enrollment increased as home values decreased in Sizemore county.
The series of data points representing average home values was plotted on the second Y axis.
Chapter 11 Guide to Individual Chart Types
161
Combination charts are a good choice if you want to make a chart with a study that
shows data in a different way than the main chart. For example, the main chart below
is a line chart showing stock information, while the study is a column chart showing
volume of trading.
This combination chart is formatted as a
stock chart.
The four series on the main chart show
price information for the stock. They are
line series with the lines made
transparent and high-low lines and
markers applied.
The column series on the study shows
volume information.
Creating Combination Charts
You create a combination chart just as you would any other chart: Select a data range,
click the chart button, and draw the chart on the worksheet. For instructions, see
“Creating a Chart” on page 126.
Next, change the chart type to Combination in the Chart Type dialog. For instructions,
see “Changing the Chart Type” on page 126.
After you change the chart type, the chart looks like the default column chart you had
before, with all the data points displayed as columns. This is because column is the
default type for displaying data on combination charts. You have to tell Formula One
for Java which types of charts you want to combine on the chart. You do this by
selecting a chart type for each series on the chart.
162
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
➤ To select a chart type for a combination chart series:
1. Select a series that you want to display in a different chart type than column. For
information on selecting series, see “Selecting Chart Elements” on page 138.
2. Choose Format Series from the context menu. Click on the Options tab, shown
below.
The four types of series
available on
combination charts are
shown here. Choose the
type you want to apply
to the selected series.
3. Click Apply to see your changes or OK to accept them.
4. Do the same for the other chart series whose types you want to change.
Special Notes About Combination Charts
Hidden data points. Depending on the chart’s data, it’s possible to inadvertently hide
some or all of the data points of one series behind another series. You can fix this
problem in several ways:
■
Rearrange the order of the series. For information, see “Changing the Order of
Chart Series” on page 186.
■
Stack the series. For information, see “Stacking Series of Data Points” on page
187.
■
Display each data point as a percent of the category total. For information, see
“Plotting Data Points as Percentages of the Category” on page 188.
Formatting options. The different chart types available on combination charts each
have their own characteristics and possibilities. For information, see the
documentation on individual chart types: “About Area Charts” on page 152, “About
Column and Bar Charts” on page 158, “About Line Charts” on page 166, and “About
Step Charts” on page 171.
Chapter 11 Guide to Individual Chart Types
163
About Doughnut Charts
Doughnut charts show each cell’s data as a slice of a doughnut. The chart may
contain one or more doughnuts, arranged one inside the other. Doughnut charts let
you show the relationship of parts of several sets of data to the whole.
Each ring of the doughnut
represents all of the people in the
indicated age group. The ring
sections show the disability status of
a portion of those people. The labels
on the doughnuts are data labels
that were edited and then dragged
and dropped into position.
Each doughnut shows a series of data. Slices of the same color belong to the same
category. Note that this is the opposite of the way Formula One for Java interprets
series and category data on most charts. This means that doughnut chart legends show
category labels, not series labels.
Formula One for Java determines the order of the doughnuts by adding the total value
of the data points in each doughnut. The doughnut with the largest total goes on the
outside, with the progressively smaller doughnuts nested inside the largest, in the
order of their total value.
Formula One for Java displays the doughnut slices clockwise in the same order as they
appear in the chart’s data source.
Sizing the Doughnut’s Hole
By default, the width of the hole in the center of the doughnut is half the width of the
largest doughnut. You may change the size of the doughnut’s hole by entering a
percentage of the total doughnut width.
Doughnut hole is 50%
of doughnut width.
Doughnut hole is 10%
of doughnut width.
Doughnut hole is 90%
of doughnut width.
164
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
➤ To change the size of the doughnut’s hole:
1. Choose the Format Plot option from the context menu.
2. Click on the Options tab.
3. In the Pie/Doughnut frame, enter a value between 10 and 90 in the Doughnut
Hole text box.
4. Click Apply to see your changes or OK to accept them.
Changing the Start Angle of the Slices
Formula One for Java displays the doughnut slices clockwise in the same order as they
appear in the chart’s data source. By default, the edge of the first slice starts at 0°, or
the 12 o’clock position. You can change the position of that starting edge. All
doughnuts on the chart must have the same starting position.
The start angle is expressed in degrees, where 180° is the 6 o’clock position.
Start angle is 0°
Start angle is 90°
➤ To change the start angle of the doughnuts’ slices:
1. Choose Format Plot from the context menu.
2. Click the Options tab.
3. In the Pie/Doughnut frame, enter a value between 0 and 360, which represents the
number of degrees.
4. Click Apply to view your changes or OK to accept your changes.
Exploding the Slices
You may display the doughnut slices adjacent to one another, as shown in the previous
examples, or you may display the doughnut as if cut into pieces, with its slices pulled
apart. This is called exploding the slices. You may do this for one or all of the
doughnuts on the chart.
Explosion percent is 0
Explosion percent is 10
Explosion percent is 30
As you can see in these examples, exploded doughnut slices are smaller than unexploded slices. They shrink because the doughnut’s outside circumference must
remain the same size to ensure that it fits on the chart plot.
You cannot pull out just one doughnut slice.
Chapter 11 Guide to Individual Chart Types
165
➤ To explode the doughnut slices:
1. Select the doughnut you want to explode.
2. Choose Format Series from the context menu, and click the Options tab.
3. In the Pie/Doughnut frame, enter a value between 0 and 100 in the Explosion
Percent text box. The value is the distance the slices are pushed away from the
doughnut’s center, expressed as a percentage of the doughnut diameter.
4. Click Apply to see your changes or OK to accept your changes.
Special Notes About Doughnut Charts
Labeling doughnuts. While Formula One for Java has no automatic option for labeling
each doughnut, you can create a data label for a doughnut slice, edit it to display the
name you want, then drag it to a new position on the doughnut. You should try to
make it clear that the label applies to the entire doughnut. For more information, see
“About Data Labels” on page 214.
The Use Weighting check box. While this check box is available in the Pie/Doughnut
frame of the Options tab of the Format Plot dialog, it has no effect on doughnut charts.
For an explanation of its effect on pie charts, see “Changing the Sizes of the Pies” on
page 169.
The Vary Colors option. On the Options tab of the Plot dialog, the Vary Colors option
is automatically selected for doughnut charts. This makes each slice of the doughnuts
a different color. If you uncheck the Vary Colors checkbox, each doughnut will appear
as a different solid color, with the slices delineated by lines. For more information on
the Vary Colors option, see “Automatically Varying Data Point Colors” on page 227.
166
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
About Line Charts
Line charts show changes in data with a fluctuating line. Each cell’s data is a point. A
series of data points is connected by a line. Line charts are effective at showing
trends or changes in data over a period of time. They emphasize time flow and rate of
change rather than amount of change.
Line charts show values along the vertical Y axis and categories along the horizontal
X axis. Each data point in a line chart is delineated by a marker.
This line chart shows
the estimated age of
first marriage of men
and women by year.
The text of the two
data labels was
edited to apply to the
entire series, and
label lines were
added.
Adding High-Low Lines to Line Charts
High-low lines link the highest data point of all series in a category to the lowest data
point of all series in a category. High-low lines are often used on stock charts to show
the highest and lowest price of the stock. Formula One for Java draws high-low lines
on all categories of a chart.
After displaying high-low lines, you may select them and change the line color and/or
style. For information, see “Changing Line Styles and Colors” on page 222.
➤ To add high-low lines to a line chart:
1. Choose Format Plot from the context menu, and click the Options tab.
2. In the Stock frame, check the High-Low Lines box.
3. Click Apply to see your changes or OK to accept your changes.
Adding Drop Lines to Line Charts
Drop lines begin at the highest data points on the chart and drop all the way down to
the X axis. Drop lines can help link the data point to its category on series with many
categories. They are often used on stock charts. Formula One for Java draws drop
lines on all categories and all series of the chart.
After displaying drop lines, you may select them and change the line color and/or
style. For information, see “Changing Line Styles and Colors” on page 222.
Chapter 11 Guide to Individual Chart Types
167
A line chart with drop lines, no markers, and transparent lines looks the same as a
column chart with one series displayed with the Show Bar As Line option turned on.
Both show lines descending from data points to the X axis. The difference is, drop
lines descend from the highest data point of all the series displayed on the chart, while
the Show Bar As Line option applies to a particular series of data points. Choose
between the two options based on whether you want to use a line or column chart and
on how many series you want to display. For more information on the Show Bar As
Line option, see “Showing Bars as Lines” on page 160.
➤ To add drop lines to a line chart:
1. Choose Format Plot from the context menu, and click the Options tab.
2. In the Stock frame, check the Drop Lines box.
3. Click Apply to see your changes or OK to accept your changes.
Adding Open-Close Bars to Line Charts
Open-close bars link the data points in the first series displayed on the chart to the
data points in the last series. Open-close bars are often used on stock charts to show
the prices at which the stock opened and closed the trading period. Formula One for
Java draws open-close bars on all categories.
Note Open-close bars will display properly only if the series of data points
representing the open and close are the first and last series on the chart. If your data
range is not set up like this, you can change the order of the chart series in the
Options tab of the Format Series dialog. For more information on changing series
order, see “Changing the Order of Chart Series” on page 186.
➤ To add open-close bars to a line chart:
1. Choose Format Plot from the context menu, and click the Options tab.
2. In the Stock frame, check the Open-Close Bars box.
3. Click Apply to see your changes or OK to accept your changes.
Formatting Open-Close Bars
After displaying open-close bars, you may change their fill and line color. You can
color the bars and their outlines differently depending on whether the value of the data
point in the first series was higher or lower than the data point in the last series. On a
stock chart, the two colors would indicate periods when the opening price was higher
and periods when it was lower than the closing price.
You also may change the width of the open-close bars.
168
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
➤ To change open-close bar fill and line colors:
1. Select the open-close bars. Formula One for Java allows you to select “open” bars
separately from “close” bars, so that you can color them differently. For more
information, see “Selecting Chart Elements” on page 138.
2. Choose Format Open-Close Bars from the context menu. The Format Open-Close
Bars dialog appears.
3. Choose a fill color, pattern, or gradient from the Fill tab. For more information,
see “Changing Fill Colors, Patterns, and Gradients” on page 223.
4. Choose an outline style and color from the Line tab. For more information, see
“Changing Line Styles and Colors” on page 222.
➤ To change the width of open-close bars:
1. Select Format Plot from the context menu and click on the Options tab.
2. Change the value in the X Gap Ratio text box. For more information, see “Setting
Bar Spacing Options” on page 158.
3. Click Apply or OK.
Special Notes About Line Charts
Stacking series. Stacked series on a line chart don’t look any different than un-stacked
series. There is no visual cue to let the viewer know that the data points on the lines at
the top of the chart represent the sum of that data point and all data points below it.
These charts show the same data, only the
series are un-stacked in the first chart and
stacked in the second.
Stacking series on line charts should be done with care to avoid misleading the viewer.
For information on how to stack series, see “Stacking Series of Data Points” on page
187.
Plotting series as percentages. When you plot data in line charts as percentages, the
top line on the chart appears flat against the upper boundary of the chart plot. This is
correct because the top series represents 100% of all the data points in the chart. For
information on plotting data as percentages, see “Plotting Data Points as Percentages
of the Category” on page 188.
Chapter 11 Guide to Individual Chart Types
169
About Pie Charts
Pie charts show each cell’s data as a slice of a pie. The chart may contain one or
more pies. Pie charts show the relationship of parts to the whole.
This pie chart divides the total number of
children in the United States 1998 and 1960
into groups based on which adult(s) they
lived with. The legend’s background and
outline were both set to Transparent.
Each pie shows a series of data; slices of the same color belong to the same category.
Note that this is the opposite of the way Formula One for Java interprets series and
category data on most charts. This means that pie chart legends show category labels,
not series labels.
Formula One for Java displays the pie slices clockwise in the same order as they
appear in the chart’s data source.
Changing the Sizes of the Pies
By default, the size of the pies is determined by the total value of the data points in
each pie. All data points in each pie are summed; the pie with the largest total is the
largest pie, with the remaining pies sized proportionally smaller.
If you don’t want to display the pies sized proportionally, you may choose to display
all the pies the same size.
➤ To change the sizes of the pies:
1. Choose the Format Plot option from the context menu.
2. Click on the Options tab.
3. In the Pie/Doughnut frame, uncheck the Use Weighting check box to make all the
pies the same size. Check the box to make the pies sized proportionally based on
their total value.
4. Click Apply to see your changes or OK to accept your changes.
170
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
Changing the Start Angle of the Slices
Formula One for Java displays the pie slices clockwise in the same order as they
appear in the chart’s data source. By default, the edge of the first slice starts at 0°, or
the 12 o’clock position. You can change the position of that starting edge. All pies on
the chart must have the same starting position.
The start angle is expressed in degrees, where 180° is the 6 o’clock position.
Start angle is 0°
Start angle is 90°
➤ To change the start angle of the pies’ slices:
1. Choose Format Plot from the context menu, and click the Options tab.
2. In the Pie/Doughnut frame, enter a value between 0 and 360, which represents the
number of degrees.
3. Click Apply to view your changes or OK to accept your changes.
Exploding the Slices
You may display the pie slices adjacent to one another, as shown in the previous
examples, or you may display the pie as if cut into pieces, with its slices pulled apart.
This is called exploding the slices. You may do this for one or all of the pies on the
chart.
Explosion percent is 0
Explosion percent is 10
Explosion percent is 30
As you can see in these examples, exploded pie slices are smaller than un-exploded
slices. They shrink because the pie’s outside circumference must remain the same size
to ensure that it fits on the chart plot.
You cannot pull out just one pie slice.
➤ To explode the pie slices:
1. Select the pie you want to explode.
2. Choose Format Series from the context menu, and click the Options tab.
3. In the Pie/Doughnut frame, enter a value between 0 and 100 in the Explosion
Percent text box. The value is the distance the slices are pushed away from the
pie’s center, expressed as a percentage of the pie diameter.
4. Click Apply to see your changes or OK to accept your changes.
Chapter 11 Guide to Individual Chart Types
171
Special Notes About Pie Charts
Changing the order of the pies. Since each pie represents a series, you can change the
order of the pies by changing the order of the series. For information, see “Changing
the Order of Chart Series” on page 186.
Labeling pies. While Formula One for Java has no automatic option for labeling each
pie, you can create a data label for a pie slice, edit it to display the name you want,
then drag it to a new position next the pie. You should try to make it clear that the
label applies to the entire pie. For more information, see “About Data Labels” on page
214.
The Vary Colors option. On the Options tab of the Plot dialog, the Vary Colors option
is automatically selected for pie charts. This makes each slice of the pies a different
color. If you uncheck the Vary Colors checkbox, each pie will appear as a different
solid color, with the slices delineated by lines. For more information, see
“Automatically Varying Data Point Colors” on page 227.
About Step Charts
Step charts show each data point as a step in a series of stair steps. Like area charts,
they show data accumulation, only they illustrate changes between data points as
distinct stair steps rather than as continuous points.
This step chart showing a decrease in
average cholesterol levels over 30 years
displays value data labels for each data
point.
Step charts are one of the chart types available on combination charts.
Special Notes About Step Charts
Selecting data points. You can’t select individual data points in step charts; you may
only select the whole area or “staircase.”
Hidden data points. Depending on the chart’s data, it’s possible to inadvertently hide
some or all of the data points of one series behind another series. You can fix this
problem in several ways:
■
Rearrange the order of the series. For information, see “Changing the Order of
Chart Series” on page 186.
172
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
■
Stack the series. For information, see “Stacking Series of Data Points” on page
187.
■
Display each data point as a percent of the category total. For information, see
“Plotting Data Points as Percentages of the Category” on page 188.
About Stock Charts
Stock charts show stock market data. There are many variations on stock charts, but
most show the range of prices attained by a stock over a length of time. Stock charts
often include studies that indicate the volume of trading over the same length of time.
This stock chart shows the range in
prices attained by a stock over a oneyear period. The main chart shows
high-low lines. The study is a line chart
showing volume information.
Stock charts differ from the other chart types in that there is no chart type for stock
charts. You can’t choose Stock from the Chart Type dialog. Instead, you create a line
or column chart and apply stock chart formats to make the line or column chart
display the stock market information appropriately.
The conversion of a line chart to a stock chart
The line chart has no stock chart
formatting.
The line chart has high-low lines
and open-close bars applied.
When the lines and markers of the
line chart are made transparent, the
stock chart appears.
Chapter 11 Guide to Individual Chart Types
173
Types of Stock Charts
High-Low Charts show the high and low price a stock attained for a
particular period of time. The chart displays a series of vertical
lines where the top of the line shows the high price, the bottom of
the line the low price.
For information, see “Creating High-Low Charts” on page 173.
Open-High-Low-Close Charts show the high and low price a stock
attained for a particular period of time as well as the opening and
closing prices of the stock for the same period. The chart shows the
same type of vertical lines displayed on a high-low chart. The
opening and closing prices can be shown in two ways: by markers
on the line, or by open-close bars superimposed on the high-low
lines.
For information, see “Creating Open-High-Low-Close Charts” on
page 174.
Volume Charts show the volume of trading, and often appear as
studies below the main chart. Volume charts can be simple line
charts, column charts, column charts in which the columns appear
as lines, or line charts showing drop lines.
For information, see “Creating Volume Charts” on page 174.
Creating High-Low Charts
➤ To create a high-low chart:
1. Create the chart’s data range containing the high and low prices. While the data
range can have any shape, it’s best to make one column of high prices and an
adjacent column of low prices.
2. Select the data range and create the chart, as explained in “Creating a Chart” on
page 126.
3. Change the chart type to Line, as explained in “Changing the Chart Type” on
page 126.
4. Add the high-low bars, as explained in “Adding High-Low Lines to Line Charts”
on page 166.
5. Select the first series and make the series line transparent, as explained in
“Changing Line Styles and Colors” on page 222. Do the same with the other
series.
After you have the high-low formatting in place, you may make any other formatting
changes to the chart that you would like. For information on your options, see
“Adding High-Low Lines to Line Charts” on page 166.
174
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
Creating Open-High-Low-Close Charts
➤ To create an open-high-low-close chart:
1. Create the chart’s data range containing the open, high, low, and close prices.
While the data range can have any shape, you will have to make the fewest
formatting changes if you enter open prices in the first column, high prices in the
second column, low prices in the third column, and close prices in the fourth
column. (See note below.)
2. Select the data range and create the chart, as explained in “Creating a Chart” on
page 126.
3. Change the chart type to Line, as explained in “Changing the Chart Type” on
page 126.
4. Add the high-low bars, as explained in “Adding High-Low Lines to Line Charts”
on page 166.
5. If you want to mark the opening and closing prices with open-close bars, add
open-close bars as explained in “Adding Open-Close Bars to Line Charts” on
page 167.
6. If you want to mark the opening and closing prices with markers, select the series
displaying the open prices and apply the marker style of your choice to it, as
explained in “About Markers” on page 225. Do the same to add markers to the
series displaying the close prices.
7. Select the first series and make the series line transparent, as explained in
“Changing Line Styles and Colors” on page 222. Do the same with the other three
series.
After you have the open-high-low-close formatting in place, you may make any other
formatting changes to the chart that you would like. For information on your options,
see “Adding High-Low Lines to Line Charts” on page 166.
Note Open-close bars will display properly only if the series of data points
representing the open and close are the first and last series on the chart. If your data
range is not set up like this, you can change the order of the chart series in the
Options tab of the Format Series dialog. For more information, see “Changing the
Order of Chart Series” on page 186.
Creating Volume Charts
Since volume charts come in many forms, there is no one set method for creating
them. The following guidelines should help you create your own volume charts.
■
Volume charts as studies. Most volume charts appear as a study below the main
chart. The basic procedure for creating studies is to enter the volume information
in the chart’s data range, then assign the series that represents the volume
numbers to the study axis. For more information, see “About Studies” on page
206.
Chapter 11 Guide to Individual Chart Types
■
■
■
175
Chart types for volume studies. When the volume chart is a study, you may want
to display its data points in a different format than the main chart. For example,
you may want the main chart to be a line chart displaying high-low lines while the
study shows volume information in columns. To do this, change the chart type to
Combination, then assign the different series to different chart types. For more
information, see “About Combination Charts” on page 160.
Volume charts showing lines. Creating volume charts showing lines is exactly the
same as creating any other line chart. For information, see “About Line Charts”
on page 166.
Volume charts showing bars. Creating volume charts showing bars is exactly the
same as creating any other column chart. For information, see “About Column
and Bar Charts” on page 158.
An especially useful feature of column charts when used as volume charts is the
Show Bar As Line option, which lets you make extremely narrow bars. For
information, see “Showing Bars as Lines” on page 160.
About XY (Scatter) Charts
XY (Scatter) charts plot two groups of numbers as one series of XY coordinates. XY
charts show the relatedness of two sets of data. If the data points cluster or bunch in a
certain configuration -- for example, if they tend to form the shape of a line -- that
indicates that the two sets of data are correlated in some way.
This XY chart compares the height and weight data
from 23 teenagers. Some of the data points are
hidden under others.
On this chart all of the height data is above 4.75 feet
and all of the weight data is above 90 lbs. The default
minimum value for value axes is 0. To avoid leaving a
large part of the plot empty, we raised the minimum
value for both axes using the Axis Scale settings.
Each marker represents a data point. Each data point must have two pieces of data
related to it: its X coordinate and its Y coordinate.
XY charts can have more than one series. Data points in one series all have the same
marker style. By default, Formula One for Java connects the markers in a series with a
line.
XY charts should be used when you want to compare two sets of values for each
series. If one of the two sets of data falls into categories in which you have one entry
176
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
per category (for example, a statistic that happens every year or for every age group),
that data is better served appearing as categories on a different type of chart.
Creating XY Charts
Because the data for XY charts can be arranged in various configurations, Formula
One for Java cannot create XY charts automatically. It needs user input to define how
the data should be used. To create an XY chart, you first create a “mock” chart using a
sample data range. Then you bring up the Chart Data tab to redefine how the data
should be used in the chart.
➤ To create an XY chart:
1. Set up the worksheet so that there are two sets of values for each data point (the X
axis value and the Y axis value). You can set up your data range in any
arrangement, even with non-contiguous cells. This is how the worksheet was set
up for the example chart.
2. To create the chart, select the cells in the chart’s data range. (Since you will later
define which cells should represent which areas, it doesn’t matter which cells you
select.) Click on the Chart button and draw the chart onto the worksheet. For
more information, see “Creating a Chart” on page 126.
3. Change the chart type to XY (Scatter), as explained in “Changing the Chart Type”
on page 126.
The chart that appears will probably look odd, but you will fix it in the next steps.
4. CTRL + click on the chart to select it, then choose Format > Object. The Chart
Data tab of the Format Object dialog will appear.
5. For an XY chart like the one in the example, which has only one series, delete all
but one series by selecting unwanted series and clicking the Delete button.
6. Select a series. Fill in the Name text box with the name you want to appear for
this series on the chart legend. You can enter the text of the name or a cell
reference pointing to the cell that contains the name.
Fill in the X Values and Y Values text boxes with range references that refer to
the appropriate ranges on the worksheet. (These range references should include
only numeric data, not heading or other text cells.)
For more information about options for filling in the Chart Data tab, see
“Changing the Chart’s Data Source” on page 182.
Here is how the Chart Data tab was filled in for the example chart.
Chapter 11 Guide to Individual Chart Types
177
7. For an XY chart with more than one series, repeat step 6 for each series on the
chart.
8. Click Apply to view your changes or OK to accept your changes.
9. Finish formatting the chart using the context menu options.
Special Notes About XY Charts
Line connecting the markers. By default, XY charts are drawn with a line connecting
all of the markers in a series. You can remove the line by selecting the series of data
points, choosing Format Series from the context menu, and clicking Transparent on
the Line Style tab. For more information, see “Changing Line Styles and Colors” on
page 222.
Labeling the data points. You may label one or all of the data points in a series with
automatic data labels that show either the X or Y values or with custom data labels
you enter yourself. To label the data points with the X values, choose Category on the
Data Labels tab. Strictly speaking, the X axis in this case is a value axis, not a
category axis, but the Data Labels tab does not reflect this distinction. For more
information, see “About Data Labels” on page 214.
Tidestone
179
C H A P T E R
1 2
Data Display in Charts
This chapter describes various ways to change how your chart data is displayed. The
following topics are covered.
■
“About Data Points” on page 180
■
“About Series” on page 180
■
“Changing Chart Series Into Categories‚” p. 181.
■
“Changing the Chart’s Data Source‚” p. 182.
■
“Changing the Order of Chart Series‚” p. 186.
■
“Stacking Series of Data Points‚” p. 187.
■
“Plotting Data Points as Percentages of the Category‚” p. 188.
Other topics related to data display but not documented in this chapter are:
■
“Working With Chart Data Ranges” on page 145, which explains basic
information about how the chart interprets worksheet data.
■
“Guide to Individual Chart Types” on page 151, which shows data display options
for each of the different chart types.
180
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
About Data Points
A data point is one piece of data on the chart. For most chart types, each data point
shows the value of the contents of one cell in the data range linked to the chart. Each
chart type displays data points differently.
On all chart types, data points are organized into series. By default, all data points in a
series are the same color. You can format data points individually or as a series.
You can edit and format data points in various ways.
For information on...
See this section
Selecting data points
“Selecting Chart Elements” on page 138
Changing data point values
“Editing Cells in the Data Range” on page 146
Labeling data points
“About Data Labels” on page 214
Changing data point fill colors
“Changing Fill Colors, Patterns, and Gradients” on page 223
“Automatically Varying Data Point Colors” on page 227
Changing data point outlines
“Changing Line Styles and Colors” on page 222
Displaying data points as
percentages of a total
“Plotting Data Points as Percentages of the Category” on
page 188
Working with a series of data
points
“About Series” on page 180
About Series
Series are sets of data points. A chart can have one or more series consisting of related
sets of data points. Each chart type displays series differently.
Often (but not always), series correspond to rows of data in the data range. For
information on how the charting software decides which cells to define as series, see
“Series and Categories in the Data Range” on page 147.
Much of the formatting you do on a chart applies to entire series of data points. For
example, on a column chart with three series, you may want to change the color of the
data points. You could change the colors of all the data points individually, but it’s
faster to select entire series and change all the data point colors at once. For
information on selecting series, see “Selecting Chart Elements” on page 138.
Series are displayed on the chart in the order in which they appear on the data source.
If you want to change the order in which the series are displayed on the chart, you
don’t have to change the cells. Instead, you can change the series order on the chart.
For information, see “Changing the Order of Chart Series” on page 186.
Chapter 12 Data Display in Charts
181
You can edit and format series in various ways.
For information on...
See this section
Selecting series
“Selecting Chart Elements” on page 138
How series are defined
“Series and Categories in the Data Range” on page 147
Changing how a chart’s series are “Changing Chart Series Into Categories” on page 181
defined
“Changing the Chart’s Data Source” on page 182
Labeling series
“About Data Labels” on page 214
Changing series fill colors
“Changing Fill Colors, Patterns, and Gradients” on page 223
Changing series outlines
“Changing Line Styles and Colors” on page 222
Stacking series
“Stacking Series of Data Points” on page 187
Changing series order
“Changing the Order of Chart Series” on page 186
Changing Chart Series Into Categories
As explained in “Series and Categories in the Data Range” on page 147, Formula One
for Java follows default guidelines for assigning the rows and columns in your data
range to series and categories in your chart.
If you don’t like the way Formula One for Java assigned your data to categories and
series, you may change it.
When you first create a chart from
this data range, Formula One for
Java makes each row into a series
and each column into a category.
You can edit the chart’s data range in
order to show the same information, only
what used to be series (Chocolate and
Vanilla) are now categories.
182
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
Note You may change a chart’s series into categories only if the chart’s data range
consists of one contiguous data range.
➤ To change series into categories:
1. Select the chart object by holding down the CTRL key and clicking on the chart.
2. Choose the Format > Object menu option. The system will display the Chart Data
tab.
3. Click on the Entire Data Range button. The system will display the Data Range
dialog with the address of the current data range displayed in the text box.
4. Change the selection for the Series In: radio buttons. If Rows is selected, select
Columns. If Columns is selected, select Rows.
5. Click OK to make the change and dismiss the Data Range dialog, then OK to
dismiss the Format Object dialog.
Changing the Chart’s Data Source
You may change many aspects of how Formula One for Java interprets the data range
for the chart. You may:
■
Change the data source for the entire chart by linking the chart to a different set of
worksheet cells.
■
Change the category names, series names, or series data by linking different parts
of the chart to different cells on the worksheet.
■
Make a chart from non-contiguous ranges of cells.
■
Add a series to the chart by linking it to worksheet cells not in the original data
range.
■
Remove a series from the chart.
■
Disconnect the chart from the worksheet by entering new information for the data
points and the headings.
This documentation breaks down the different tasks for changing the chart’s data
source into two main topics: “Changing the Entire Chart’s Data Source” on page 183
and “Changing Chart’s Data Source for Series and Headings” on page 184.
Chapter 12 Data Display in Charts
183
Changing the Entire Chart’s Data Source
➤ To change the data source linked to the entire chart:
1. Select the chart object by holding down the CTRL key and clicking on the chart.
2. Choose the Format > Object menu option. The system will display the Chart Data
tab.
3. Click the Entire Data Range button. The system will display the Chart Data
dialog, shown below.
This is the data range currently linked to
the chart.
These buttons indicate whether Formula One for Java defines series
as rows or columns of the range shown above.
4. The dialog will display the address of the data range currently linked to the chart,
unless the chart data source has already been edited and is no longer one
contiguous range. In that case, the dialog will state “Data range formula is too
complex to show.”
Type in a different range reference that you want to attach to this chart. It can be
an absolute or relative reference. For information on absolute and relative range
references, see “Understanding Cell References” on page 49.
5. Choose whether you want rows or columns of the range you entered to become
series data by clicking either the Rows or Columns button.
6. Press OK.
Formula One for Java will re-parse the chart data using the data range and series
information you entered. A sample of the chart using the new data range will appear
in the Sample frame of the Format Object dialog.
184
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
Changing Chart’s Data Source for Series and Headings
➤ To change the chart’s data source for series and headings:
1. Select the chart object by holding down the CTRL key and clicking on the chart.
2. Choose the Format > Object menu option. The system will display the Chart Data
tab, shown below.
The chart’s series are listed
here.
The data in these four text boxes
applies to the series selected at
left.
The data in this text box applies
to the entire chart.
These buttons let you add and
delete series.
This sample shows what your
chart will look like when the
changes are made.
Click here to enter a new data range for the entire chart.
3. The notes in the following table describe each text box and button on this dialog
box and explain how to use it. When you are finished changing the chart’s data
source, click Apply to view your changes or OK to accept your changes.
Name text box
This is the name of the
selected series.
X Values text box
These are the data points’ X
values for the selected series.
You may enter:
■ A reference to a cell containing the name.
■ The name. Any text you enter will become the series
name. You do not have to enclose it in quotation marks.
Entering text here disconnects the series name from the
worksheet.
This text box is enabled only for XY and bubble charts. For
more information, see “About Bubble Charts” on page 153
and “About XY (Scatter) Charts” on page 175.
Chapter 12 Data Display in Charts
Y Values text box
These are the data points that
correspond to the selected
series.
185
You may enter:
■ A reference to cells containing the data point values. If
the range reference contains fewer cells than the number
of categories, the last categories will show 0 values for
that series. If it contains more cells than the number of
categories, that many more categories will be added to the
chart.
■ An array constant containing the data point values.
Enclose the array constant in curly brackets {}. Entering
an array constant here disconnects the data points in this
series from the worksheet.
Sizes text box
This text box is enabled only for bubble charts. For more
These are the bubble sizes for information, see “About Bubble Charts” on page 153.
the selected series.
Categories text box
These are the names of the
categories on the chart.
You may enter:
■ A reference to cells containing the category names. If
the range reference contains fewer cells than the number
of categories, the last categories will show numeric values
for those category names. If it contains more cells than the
number of categories, that many more categories will be
added to the chart.
■ An array constant containing the category names.
Enclose the array constant in curly brackets {}. Text
values in array constants must be enclosed in quotation
marks. Entering an array constant here disconnects the
category names from the worksheet.
Since bubble and XY charts have no categories, this text box
is disabled for those chart types.
Add button
This button lets you add a
series to the chart.
Click this button to add a series to the chart. A new series
will appear at the bottom of the series list. (Later, you may
rearrange the series order in the Option tab of the Format
Series dialog.)
The series data points won’t appear on the chart until you set
data point values in the Y Values text box. Similarly, the
series name will default to Series# until you establish a
name in the Name text box.
Delete button
Select the series you want to delete, then click this button.
This button lets you remove a The series data points will be removed from the chart and the
series name will be removed from the legend.
series from the chart.
Entire Data Range button
This button lets you change
the data range linked to the
entire chart.
For information, see “Changing the Entire Chart’s Data
Source” on page 183.
186
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
Changing the Order of Chart Series
By default, charts display series in the order in which the series appear in the chart’s
data range. Sometimes that order becomes inappropriate once the data is plotted on
the chart, especially in area and step charts, where the first series can block the display
of later series.
To fix this problem, you may change the order of the series. Changing the series order
also changes the order in which the legend displays the series names.
The Store series is hidden behind
the Warehouse series.
Moving the Store series down makes it
visible on the chart. Note that the order of
the series in the legend has changed.
A series plotted on a study will stay on that study even when you change the order of
that series.
Note You may also display hidden series by stacking them or displaying them as
percentages of the category total. For information on stacking, see “Stacking Series
of Data Points” on page 187. For information on displaying series as percentages, see
“Plotting Data Points as Percentages of the Category” on page 188.
➤ To change the order of series on a chart:
1. Select any chart series. For information on how to select chart elements, see
“Selecting Chart Elements” on page 138.
2. Choose the Format Series menu option and click on the Options tab, shown
below.
Chapter 12 Data Display in Charts
187
The chart’s series are listed
here in their current order.
Click here to move the
selected series up one slot.
Click here to move the
selected series down one
slot.
Click here to restore the
series to their original order.
3. Click Apply to see your changes or OK to accept your changes.
Stacking Series of Data Points
For area, bar, column, line, and step charts, by default each series of data is plotted
starting from the X axis. This means the data points are shown on an equal footing
with each other, each its own distance from the X axis.
You may choose to stack series one on top of the other, so that the data points from
one series are arranged on top of the data points of another series. Stacking is useful if
you want to show each data point’s contribution to the total of all the data points in a
category.
Original chart
Chart with stacked series
Stacking this chart’s series puts the Prescription series on top of the Over-the-Counter series. Notice that the
value axis (the Y axis) is automatically adjusted to account for the larger size of the stacked data points.
188
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
➤ To stack series:
1. Select the Format Plot menu option from the context menu.
2. Click on the Options tab.
3. In the Options frame, select the Stacked check box.
4. Click Apply to see your changes or OK to accept your changes.
Special Notes About Stacking Series
Stacking bar and column charts. By default, stacked series on bar and column charts
are offset from one another, as shown in the example above. To line up all the stacked
series one on top of the other, change the plot’s Bar Gap Ratio to -100. For
information on Bar Gap Ratio, see “Setting Bar Spacing Options” on page 158.
Stacking line charts. Since data points on line charts are not visually linked to the X
axis, stacking series on line charts should be done with care to avoid misleading the
viewer. For more information, see “Special Notes About Line Charts” on page 168.
Preset value axes. When you stack series, Formula One for Java automatically adjusts
the chart’s value axis, as shown above. However, if you have previously adjusted the
value axis scale so that it is no longer automatically scaled, the settings you chose for
that axis remain. If the Maximum value you set is not large enough to accommodate
the now-stacked data points, some of them may go off the chart. For more information
on scaling value axes, see “About Axis Scale” on page 193.
Applies to all series and studies. When you stack series, you have to stack all of the
series on a chart. You may not stack some series and leave others un-stacked. This
also applies to charts with studies and second Y axes: If you stack the series on the
main chart, multiple series displayed on the same study will be stacked as well.
Plotting Data Points as Percentages of the Category
For area, bar, column, line, and step charts, by default each series of data is plotted
starting from the X axis. This means the data points are shown on an equal footing
with each other, each its own distance from the X axis.
You may choose to display each data point as a percentage of the total of all data
points for that category. This means that the series will appear one on top of the other,
and the total of all the series will fill the entire chart’s plot. The value axis will be
adjusted to show values from 0 to 1.
Chapter 12 Data Display in Charts
189
This area chart shows population numbers for
men and women by age. It shows the total
number of men separately from the total number
of women.
The same chart is displayed with the values as
percentages of the total. This emphasizes the
drastic decrease in the number of males in the
80+ category. This chart is useful for showing
the distribution between males and females in
the total population of each age group. Notice
that the value axis displays percentage values.
For comparison, the same chart is
displayed with its series stacked.
This chart emphasizes the total
numbers of people (men and
women) in each age group.
The percentage breakdown is done by totalling all data points in a category, then
finding the percentage of that total for each data point. While each category total will
be different, each will be displayed as 100%. It is as if you took the data displayed in
the third chart shown above and stretched it upwards so the upper bounding line were
a straight line parallel to the X axis, while keeping the proportion of the two areas the
same. The result is the second chart shown above.
Series plotted as percentages automatically appear one on top of the other. You do not
have to choose the Stacked option to achieve this effect.
190
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
➤ To plot data points as percentages of the category total:
1. Select the Format Plot menu option from the context menu.
2. Click on the Options tab.
3. In the Options frame, select the Percent check box.
4. Click Apply to see your changes or OK to accept your changes.
Special Notes About Plotting Series as Percentages
Chart types. As mentioned earlier, you may plot series as percentages on area, bar,
column, line, and step charts. On bar and column charts, the series are offset from one
another, as shown in the example for “Stacking Series of Data Points” on page 187.
Appropriate types of data. This type of chart should only be used when the chart
contains two or more series that contribute to a total. A chart with just one series
displayed as a percent of total displays each data point as the total. Also, displaying
series as percentages may be misleading on charts whose series add up to less than the
total (for example, sales figures for quarters 1, 2, and 3 but not quarter 4), unless you
note that these are percentages of part of the total.
Percentages on the value axis labels. The value axis labels displayed on a chart plotted
as percentages will show values from 0 to 1. You can change the number format of the
axis labels to show percentage values with trailing percent signs. For more
information, see “Changing Number Formats” on page 218.
Preset value axes. When you plot series as percentages of the category totals, Formula
One for Java automatically adjusts the chart’s value axis to display percentage values
from 0 to1, as shown above. However, if you have previously adjusted the value axis
scale so that it is no longer automatically scaled, the settings you chose for that axis
remain. The data will display between the 0 and 1 values of the current value axis. If
the Maximum value is large (in the hundreds or thousands), the chart data may not
even appear on the chart, since the space between the 0 and 1 values on such an axis is
tiny. In this case, it’s best to set the value axis scale to Automatic. For more
information on scaling value axes, see “About Axis Scale” on page 193.
Applies to all series and studies. When you plot series as percentages of the category
totals, you do so for all of the series on a chart. You may not plot some series as
percentages and plot others as values. This also applies to charts with studies and
second Y axes: If you plot the series on the main chart as percentages, series displayed
on studies will appear as percentages as well.
191
C H A P T E R
1 3
Axes in Charts
This chapter shows how to format various aspects of chart axes. The following topics
are covered.
■
“About Category and Value Axes” on page 192
■
“About Axis Scale” on page 193
■
“Hiding an Axis” on page 196
■
“About Axis Labels” on page 196.
■
“About Ticks” on page 199
■
“About Grid Lines” on page 201
■
“About Axis Intersection” on page 202
■
“Reversing the Order of Categories or Values” on page 203
■
“About Logarithmic Value Axes” on page 204
■
“About Second Y Axes” on page 205
■
“About Studies” on page 206
■
“Changing Axis Settings for the Entire Chart” on page 209
Other topics related to axes but not documented in this chapter are:
■
“About Axis Titles” on page 213
■
“Changing Number Formats” on page 218, which explains how to apply number
formats to axis labels
■
“Changing Line Styles and Colors” on page 222, which explains how to change
the color or line style of the axis
192
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
About Category and Value Axes
All Formula One for Java charts except pie and doughnut charts have axes. Axes
provide a fixed reference that let you compare different data points on the chart. Axes
come in two types: category and value.
value axis
category axis
Category axes show the names of the chart’s categories. Labels showing the category
names appear between ticks.
Value axes show numbers against which the data points are plotted. Labels showing
the values appear for major axis divisions.
A chart may have a value and a category axis or two category axes. The table below
shows the axis types assigned to each chart type and their horizontal or vertical
orientation.
Chart type
Horizontal Axis
Vertical Axis
Column
Category
Value
Line
Category
Value
Area
Category
Value
Step
Category
Value
Bar
Value
Category
Combination
Category
Value
XY (Scatter)
Value
Value
Bubble
Value
Value
Chapter 13 Axes in Charts
193
About Axis Scale
The scale of an axis is the units into which the axis is divided. The units are marked
by ticks, labels, and grid lines. When you change an axis’ scale, you change how the
ticks, labels, and grid lines will display.
The scale of a category axis is very simple: Each category is one unit. The axis is
divided into the same number of units as categories. The only choices you have for
category axis scale is whether and how often to display axis labels, ticks, and grid
lines.
The scale of a value axis is more complex because you have to choose minimum and
maximum axis values and determine where the divisions between the maximum and
minimum should fall.
Category Axis Scale
Grid lines
Tick
Axis label
Value Axis Scale
Maximum value
Minor divisions are marked by minor
grid lines (gray)
Major divisions are marked by major
grid lines (black)
Tick
Axis label
Minimum value
Value Axis Scale Settings
When you create a new chart that uses axes, Formula One for Java automatically
assigns a scale to that chart’s value axis by using an internal algorithm to configure
four axis scale settings. All of these settings are based on the data in the chart. You
can later change these settings. The settings are:
Maximum is the highest value shown on the axis. When the axis is automatically
scaled, Maximum is set at a value higher than the largest data point on the chart.
Minimum is the lowest value shown on the axis. When the axis is automatically scaled,
Minimum is set at a value lower than the smallest data point on the chart.
Major divisions are the largest units into which the axis is divided. An axis ranging
from 0 to 100 might have major divisions at every 10 units. Major divisions are
marked by axis labels. You may also choose to mark major divisions with ticks and
major grid lines.
Minor divisions are sub-units of the major divisions. An axis with major divisions
every 10 units might have minor divisions every 2 units. You may choose to mark
minor divisions with minor grid lines.
194
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
Changing Axis Scale Settings
➤ To change the scale settings of a category axis:
1. Select the axis.
2. Choose Format Axis from the context menu and click the Scale tab, shown below.
Enter the number of categories you
want to appear between tick marks. To
show a tick mark for each category,
enter 1.
Enter the number of categories that
should appear between labels. Enter 1
to show a label for each category.
3. Click OK or Apply to see your changes.
Chapter 13 Axes in Charts
195
➤ To change the scale settings of a value axis:
1. Select the axis.
2. Choose Format Axis from the context menu and click the Scale tab, shown below.
To change the axis scale, un-check the
Automatic box.
Enter values in these four text boxes.
See below.
3. In the Frequency frame, un-check the Automatic box to enable data entry for the
four text boxes.
4. For Minimum and Maximum, enter the smallest and largest value that you want
the axis to display.
5. Major Divisions shows the number of major divisions into which you want to
divide the values that fall between Maximum and Minimum. For example, when
Minimum is 10 and Maximum is 80, enter 7 to mark the axis every 10 units.
6. Minor Divisions shows the number of minor divisions into which you want to
divide the values between each major division. For example, when the major
divisions are 10 units large, enter 5 to mark the axis every 2 units.
7. Click Apply or OK.
Note Setting axis scale options establishes where ticks and major and minor grid lines
should appear on the chart, but it does not determine whether or not they are
displayed. For information on how to display ticks, see “About Ticks” on page 199.
For information on how to display grid lines, see “Showing and Hiding Grid Lines”
on page 201.
196
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
Hiding an Axis
Hiding an axis removes all elements of the axis: the axis line, ticks, grid lines, axis
labels, and the axis title. You may want to hide an axis if it gets in the way or if you
don’t want the labels, tick marks, and other axis elements to interfere with the chart’s
display.
➤ To hide an axis:
1. Select the axis.
2. Choose Format Axis from the context menu and click the Options tab.
3. In the Show frame, un-check the Axis checkbox.
4. Click OK or Apply.
Note To redisplay a hidden axis, select Plot from the context menu and click the Axes
tab. Choose the axis you want to redisplay from the drop-down menu in the Select
Axis frame, check the Axis checkbox in the Show frame, and click OK or Apply.
About Axis Labels
Axis labels are text that mark major divisions on a chart. Category axis labels show
category names; value axis labels show values.
Value axis labels
Axis title
Category axis labels
Editing Axis Labels
You cannot directly edit the axis label text — that is, you cannot click on a label and
edit the text. However, Formula One for Java provides other ways to edit the label text.
■
Editing category axis labels. For category axes, you can edit the cell that contains
the category axis label text in the worksheet data range attached to the chart. Any
edits you make will immediately appear in the axis labels.
You may also change the data range attached to the chart’s category axis labels, so
that a different range of cells is used to define the categories. For more
information about changing the chart’s data ranges, see “Changing Chart’s Data
Source for Series and Headings” on page 184.
Chapter 13 Axes in Charts
■
197
Editing value axis labels. For value axes, Formula One for Java calculates the
numbers that appear in the labels by dividing the difference between the axis’
maximum and minimum values by the number of major divisions. You can
change the maximum, minimum, and number of major divisions in order to
change the numbers that appear on the scale.
This chart’s Y axis has a maximum of
15 and 3 major divisions.
When the maximum is changed to 16 and the major
divisions are changed to 4, the value axis labels change.
You may change how the numeric data in the value axis labels is displayed by
changing the labels’ number format. For more information, see “Changing
Number Formats” on page 218.
Displaying Axis Labels
Axis labels are always displayed with the axis. You cannot hide axis labels without
hiding the entire axis.
For value axes, an axis label will appear at the top and bottom of the axis and for
every major division.
For category axes, the first category’s axis label always appears. You can set how
often the remaining axis labels appear.
➤ To set the frequency of category axis labels:
1. Select the category axis.
2. Choose Format Axis from the context menu and click the Scale tab.
3. In the Number of categories between labels text box, enter 1 to display a label on
every category, 2 to display a label on every other category, 3 to display a label on
every third category, etc.
4. Click OK or Apply.
198
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
Disappearing Axis Labels?
On large charts, Formula One for Java displays all the axis labels as explained above.
However, on smaller charts, Formula One for Java may drop axis labels that don’t fit.
This is because axis labels’ font sizes remain the same when you shrink or expand the
plot, so that the amount of space available for an axis label may be smaller than the
label text.
This chart is too small to display any but one category
axis label and three value axis labels.
When the same chart is expanded, more labels,
tick marks, and grid lines appear on both axes.
The chart is finally big enough to
display all its axis labels.
To fix this problem, try any or all of the following:
■
Widen the chart or the plot.
■
Apply a smaller font size and/or a different font style to the axis labels in the Font
tab of the Format Axis dialog. See “Changing Fonts, Font Styles, and Font
Colors” on page 219.
■
Display fewer value axis labels by reducing the number of major divisions in the
Scale tab of the Format Axis dialog. See “Changing Axis Scale Settings” on page
194.
■
Shorten category axis label text by editing it in the worksheet data range attached
to the chart. See “Editing Cells in the Data Range” on page 146.
Chapter 13 Axes in Charts
199
About Ticks
A tick is a short line on an axis. For category axes, ticks separate each category. For
value axes, ticks mark the major divisions and show the exact point on an axis that the
axis label defines. Ticks are always the same color and line style as the axis.
ticks
Ticks come in two types: major and minor.
Major ticks separate the axis into major units. On category axes, major ticks are the
only ticks available (you cannot show minor ticks on a category axis). On value axes,
one major tick appears for every major axis division.
Minor ticks subdivide the major tick units. They can only appear on value axes. One
minor tick appears for every minor axis division.
By default, major ticks appear for value axes. You can show or hide ticks for both
value and category axes.
The number of ticks displayed depends on the Major Divisions and Minor Divisions
settings in the Scale tab of the Format Axis dialog.
200
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
➤ To show, hide, or choose the style of ticks:
1. Select the axis whose ticks you want to display or hide.
2. Choose Format Axis from the context menu and click the Options tab, shown
below.
For ticks that mark major divisions,
choose the options here.
For ticks that mark minor divisions,
choose the options here.
3. Choose positioning options for both major and minor ticks. The options are: None
for no ticks, Outside for ticks on the outside of the axis (between the axis and the
axis labels), Inside for ticks in the plot area of the chart, and Cross for ticks that
cross the axis.
4. In the Length text boxes, enter the length you want the ticks to be, in points.
5. Click OK or Apply.
Note Since category axes have no minor divisions, they cannot display minor ticks.
Checking anything but None in the Minor Ticks frame has no effect on category
axes.
Chapter 13 Axes in Charts
201
About Grid Lines
Grid lines are lines that cross the chart plot to show axis divisions. Grid lines help
viewers of the chart see what value is represented by an unlabeled data point.
Especially for large or complicated charts, grid lines give valuable cues to the viewer.
grid lines
Grid lines come in two types: major and minor.
Major grid lines separate the axis into major units. On category axes, major grid lines
are the only grid lines available (you cannot show minor grid lines on a category axis.)
On value axes, major grid lines are drawn for every major axis division.
Minor grid lines separate the units delineated by major grid lines. Minor grid lines,
which can only appear on value axes, appear for every minor axis division.
By default, major grid lines appear for value axes. You can show or hide grid lines for
both value and category axes.
The number of grid lines that display depends on the Major Divisions and Minor
Divisions settings in the Scale tab of the Format Axis dialog.
Showing and Hiding Grid Lines
➤ To show or hide major or minor grid lines:
1. Select the axis whose grid lines you want to display or hide. Grid lines run
perpendicular to the axis.
2. Choose Format Axis from the context menu and click the Options tab.
3. In the Show frame, check Major Grid or Minor Grid (or both) to display the grid
lines. Un-check one or both to hide the grid lines.
To discover how many grid lines will display, see the entries for Major Divisions
and Minor Divisions on the Scale tab of the Format Axis dialog.
4. Click OK or Apply.
Note Since category axes have no minor divisions, they cannot display minor grid
lines. Checking the Minor Grid checkbox has no effect on category axes.
202
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
About Grid Line Colors and Line Styles
By default, major and minor grid lines are black, so you can’t tell the major grid lines
from the minor ones. You can change the grid lines’ colors and line styles to
differentiate them from each other or to make them less conspicuous on your chart.
While major and minor grid lines may be different colors, all of the major grid lines
on a chart must be the same color. All of the minor grid lines on a chart must likewise
be the same color.
For information on how to change the grid line colors and line styles, see “Changing
Line Styles and Colors” on page 222.
About Axis Intersection
The two axes on a chart must intersect. By default, category axes intersect to the left
of the first category, and value axes intersect at 0. If 0 does not appear on the value
axis, it will intersect at the value closest to 0.
You may choose to change the intersection in order to change the emphasis on certain
chart values. Or you may want to change the intersection if you reversed the order of
the axis categories or values and you don’t like the resulting change in the axis
location.
You can change the axis intersection in a variety of ways:
■
You can choose the value at which you want a value axis to intersect.
■
You can choose the category at which you want a category axis to intersect.
■
You can make an axis intersect at its maximum category or value.
The default category and value axis intersections
The value axis intersection is set at 15.
The value axis intersection is set to maximum.
➤ To enter the value at which the value axis will intersect:
1. Select the axis.
2. Choose Format Axis from the context menu and click the Scale tab.
3. In the Intersection frame, un-check the Automatic box to enable the Crosses At
text box. Then enter the value in the Crosses At box.
Chapter 13 Axes in Charts
203
4. Make sure the Adjacent axis intersects at maximum value check box is
unchecked.
5. Click OK or Apply.
➤ To choose the category at which the category axis will intersect:
1. Select the axis.
2. Choose Format Axis from the context menu and click the Scale tab.
3. In the Intersection/Frequency frame, enter a value in the Adjacent axis crosses at
category number text box corresponding to the category to the left of which you
want the axis to intersect. If your chart has four categories, enter 2 to place the
axis intersection between the first two categories.
4. Make sure the Adjacent axis intersects at maximum category check box is
unchecked.
5. Click OK or Apply.
➤ To make an axis intersect at its maximum category or value:
1. Select the axis.
2. Choose Format Axis from the context menu and click the Scale tab.
3. For category axes, check the Adjacent axis intersects at maximum category
checkbox. For value axes, check the Adjacent axis intersects at maximum value
check box.
4. Click OK or Apply.
Axis Intersection’s Effect on Axis Labels
When you change the axis intersection of a chart to make the axes appear within the
chart plot, the axis labels appear within the chart plot as well.
For vertical axes, axis labels will always appear to the left of the axis, except when the
axis intersects at the maximum value, in which case they will be outside of the plot
area on the right of the axis.
For horizontal axes, axis labels will always appear below the axis, except when the
axis intersects at the maximum value, in which case they will be outside of the plot
area, above the axis.
Reversing the Order of Categories or Values
You may choose to display the categories or values on an axis in reverse order. This
may help emphasize a particular aspect of your chart or it may simply save you from
having to edit the chart’s data range.
204
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
The axis intersection may automatically change when you change the order of the
categories or values. In this case, you may have to change the axis intersection to
place the axis where you want it.
Reversing the order of the values on
the value axis of this chart
automatically placed the category
axis at the top of the chart.
➤ To reverse the order of categories or values on an axis:
1. Select the axis.
2. Choose Format Axis from the context menu and click the Scale tab.
3. For a value axis, check the Values in reverse order checkbox. For a category axis,
check the Categories in reverse order checkbox.
4. Click OK or Apply.
About Logarithmic Value Axes
For certain types of data, a logarithmic value axis is the best choice to display the
data. You may specify the log base.
These two charts display the same data with a linear and a logarithmic axis.
➤ To make a value axis logarithmic:
1. Select the value axis.
2. Choose Format Axis from the context menu and click the Scale tab.
3. Check the Logarithmic box and enter a log base in the Log Base text box.
4. Click OK or Apply.
Chapter 13 Axes in Charts
205
About Second Y Axes
A second Y axis is a Y axis drawn on the right-hand side of a chart. It can show the
same axis scale as the primary Y axis or a different scale.
You can use a second Y axis with the same scale as the primary Y axis on a wide chart
to help viewers interpret the data more easily.
Primary Y axis
Second Y axis
You can use a second Y axis with a different scale than the primary Y axis to plot a
series of data on a different scale. This lets you compare two dissimilar series of data
on the same chart without overemphasizing the importance of the larger series.
Creating Second Y Axes
To create a second Y axis, you indicate which series should appear on the second Y
axis. The second Y axis appears automatically.
➤ To plot a series on a second Y axis and automatically create the second Y axis:
1. Select the series.
2. Choose Format Series from the context menu and click the Options tab.
3. In the Options frame, in the Plot Series on Axis dropdown listbox, select Value
(Y) Axis 2.
4. Click OK or Apply.
206
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
Working With Second Y Axes
A problem with plotting different series on different Y axes is that the chart itself
doesn’t indicate which series corresponds to which Y axis. This can be quite
confusing because the viewer can’t immediately identify the values of individual data
points.
Is the value of this data point just
above 50 or just above 2500?
To help alleviate this problem, try any or all of the following:
■
On one or more series, display data point labels showing data point values. See
“About Data Labels” on page 214.
■
Assign a color to each axis, its axis labels, and grid lines. Then make the series
the same color as its corresponding axis. See “Changing Line Styles and Colors”
on page 222 and “Changing Fill Colors, Patterns, and Gradients” on page 223.
■
Make a note in the axis title or in the chart title indicating which series
corresponds to which axis. See “About Axis Titles” on page 213 and “About
Chart Titles” on page 129.
About Studies
A study is a separate chart shown below the main chart in the same plot area. Studies
share the same X axis and usually show similar data on a different scale. Stock charts,
which show the activity of a particular stock over a length of time, frequently display
studies that show the volume of stocks traded during that same time period.
Example stock chart
The main chart shows one stock’s weekly high and
low prices for a year.
The study shows the volume of trading during that
same time period.
Studies are useful for comparing data on vastly different scales.
Chapter 13 Axes in Charts
207
All charts that have axes can have studies. You may create one or many studies for a
particular chart. Since studies share the same plot, characteristics of the plot such as
fill area and line style must be the same for the main chart and the study. Similarly,
since they share the same X axis, they must also share the same X axis grid lines, tick
marks, axis labels, etc. However, since the two charts have separate Y axes, they may
show different types of Y axis grid lines, tick marks, axis labels, etc.
Unlike the main chart, studies cannot have second Y axes.
Quick Guide to Creating Studies
Task
Description
Set the number
of studies
(optional)
■
In the Axes tab of the Format Plot dialog, enter “Setting the Number of
the sum of the number of studies you want to
Studies for a Chart” on
display plus 2 in the (Y) Axis Count text box. page 207
Indicate which
series should
appear on which
study.
■
Select the series to display in a study.
In the Options tab of the Format Series dialog,
choose a study axis in the Plot Series on Axis
dropdown listbox.
“Displaying a Series in
a Study” on page 208
Assign length
ratios to main
chart and study
■
Select the main chart’s Y axis.
In the Options tab of the Format Axis dialog,
enter the ratio for the main chart in the Length
Ratio text box.
Do the same for the study.
“Assigning Length
Ratios to the Main
Chart and Studies” on
page 208
Select the Y axis of the chart or study for
which you want. to hide the X axis.
In the Options tab of the Format Axis dialog,
un-check the Adjacent (X) check box.
“Hiding the X Axis for
a Main Chart or Study”
on page 208
■
■
■
Hide one of the
X axes
(optional)
■
■
For more information
Setting the Number of Studies for a Chart
To create a chart with studies, you may begin by establishing how many studies the
chart has. You may also begin by assigning a data series to a study, which will
automatically create a new study. Since the process of assigning a series to an as-yet
nonexistent study automatically creates the study, establishing the number of studies
first is optional.
➤ To set the number of studies in a chart:
1. Choose Format Plot from the context menu and click the Axes tab.
2. In the (Y) Axis Count text box, enter the sum of the number of studies you want
on the chart, plus two. This is because the entry in this text box is for the total
number of Y axes on the chart, including the main chart’s Y axis and its second Y
axis. The first study is actually the third Y axis on the chart. So to create one
study, enter 3. Two create two studies, enter 4.
3. Click OK or Apply.
208
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
Displaying a Series in a Study
Displaying a series in a study will remove that series of data points from the main
chart and display it on a study below the main chart. You may display a series on a
study that has already been created for a chart. You may also create a study by
assigning a series to a study axis. Assigning the series to the as-yet nonexistent study
axis automatically creates the study.
➤ To display one of a chart’s series in a study:
1. Select the series.
2. Choose Format Series from the context menu and click the Options tab.
3. In the Options frame, in the Plot Series on Axis dropdown listbox, select which
study axis you want this series to appear on. Study Axis 1 refers to the first study.
4. Click OK or Apply.
Assigning Length Ratios to the Main Chart and Studies
The main chart and its study occupy the same plot area on the chart. You can
determine how much of the plot area the main chart and each study take up by
entering ratios for each. The fraction of the plot assigned to each Y axis is determined
by dividing the axis’ length ratio by the total of all length ratios for all Y axes in the
chart.
By default, the main chart and each study all have a length ratio of 1. This means that
the Y axes on the main chart and each study will all be equal in length. Length ratios
of 4 for the main chart and 1 for the study mean the main chart’s Y axis will be 4
times as long as the study’s Y axis, and will take up 4/5 of the plot area.
➤ To assign a length ratio to the main chart or study:
1. Select the Y axis for the main chart or study.
2. Choose Format Axis from the context menu and click the Options tab.
3. In the Y Axis Options frame, enter a number in the Length Ratio text box.
4. Click OK or Apply.
Hiding the X Axis for a Main Chart or Study
Both the main chart and its studies share the same X axis. Since displaying the X axis
on both charts duplicates information, one of the X axes is usually hidden when a
chart has a study.
➤ To hide the X axis for a chart that has a study:
1. Select the Y axis for the main chart or study whose X axis you want to hide.
2. Choose Format Axis from the context menu and click the Options tab.
3. In the Y Axis Options frame, un-check the Adjacent (X) check box.
4. Click OK or Apply.
Chapter 13 Axes in Charts
209
Changing Axis Settings for the Entire Chart
Because charts have many axis settings, and because it’s time-consuming to bring up a
different dialog box to make the same changes to different axes, Formula One for Java
provides the Axes tab on the Format Plot dialog. This tab lets you change many axis
settings for any axis on the chart. Specifically, the Axes tab lets you:
■
add and remove second Y axes
■
add and remove studies
■
show or hide the Y axis’ adjacent X axis
■
adjust the Y axis’ length ratio
■
show or hide the axis
■
show or hide the major and/or minor grid lines
■
show or hide ticks
■
change the length and position of ticks
➤ To change axis settings for one or more axes:
1. Choose Plot from the context menu and click the Axes tab.
2. In the Select Axis dropdown listbox, select the axis whose settings you want to
change.
3. Make the changes, then click Apply. The changes you make will only apply to the
axis shown in the Select Axis dropdown listbox.
4. Select a different axis from the Select Axis dropdown listbox, make other axis
setting changes, and click Apply to view your changes.
5. When you are finished, click OK.
Tidestone
211
C H A P T E R
1 4
Text and Numbers in Charts
This chapter shows how to change the appearance of text and numbers in titles, labels,
and legends in charts. The following topics are covered.
■
“Editing Text and Numbers” on page 212, which gives general guidelines on
entering and editing text and numbers. It also includes a quick guide.
■
“About Axis Titles” on page 213
■
“About Data Labels” on page 214
■
“Changing Number Formats” on page 218
■
“Changing Fonts, Font Styles, and Font Colors” on page 219
Other topics related to text and numbers but not documented in this chapter are:
■
“Changing the Legend Text” on page 132
■
“Editing Axis Labels” on page 196
■
“About Chart Titles” on page 129
212
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
Editing Text and Numbers
Editing text and numbers in charts is different depending on which chart element the
text or numbers is attached to.
■
For some chart text and numbers, you select the chart element and make changes
in a dialog box.
■
For some chart text and numbers, you change the data in the chart’s data range on
the worksheet.
The following quick guide shows the different types of chart text in alphabetical order
and brief instructions for changing each of them. The quick guide also shows where to
go to find more in-depth instructions.
Quick Guide to Editing Chart Text and Numbers
To edit the...
You must...
Axis titles
■
■
■
For more information...
Select the axis.
“About Axis Titles” on
Choose Format Axis from the context page 213
menu.
Change the Text value in the Options
tab of the Format Axis dialog.
Category axis labels
Change the category names in the chart’s “Headings in the Data
data range on the worksheet.
Range” on page 147
Chart title
■
■
■
Data labels: number
format
■
■
■
Data labels: on one
data point
■
■
■
or
■
■
Select the title.
Choose Title from the context menu.
Change the Text value in the Options
tab of the Format Title dialog box.
“About Chart Titles” on
page 129.
“Changing Number
Select the data label(s).
Choose the Format Data Labels menu Formats” on page 218
option.
Choose a number format in the
Number tab of the Format Data Labels
dialog box.
Select the data point.
Choose the Format Data Point menu
option.
Choose an option in the Data Labels
tab of the Format Data Point dialog
box.
“Displaying Data Labels”
on page 214
“Editing Data Label Text”
Double-click the label.
on page 215
In the Options tab of the Format Data
Labels dialog box, deselect the
Automatic check box and change the
text in the text box.
Chapter 14 Text and Numbers in Charts
To edit the...
You must...
Data labels: on all
data points in the
chart
■
Data labels: on one
series
■
■
■
■
Choose the Plot menu option.
Choose an option in the Data Labels
tab of the Format Plot dialog box.
Change the series names in the chart’s
data range on the worksheet.
Value axis labels
■
■
Value axis labels:
number formats
■
■
■
For more information...
“Displaying Data Labels”
on page 214
Select the series.
“Displaying Data Labels”
Choose the Format Series menu option. on page 214
Choose an option in the Data Labels
tab of the Format Series dialog box.
Legend
■
213
“Headings in the Data
Range” on page 147
“Changing Axis Scale
Select the axis.
Choose Format Axis from the context Settings” on page 194
menu.
Choose different settings in the Scale
tab of the Format Axis dialog box.
“Changing Number
Select the axis.
Choose Format Axis from the context Formats” on page 218
menu.
Choose a number format in the
Number tab of the Format Axis dialog
box.
About Axis Titles
An axis title is a word or phrase that describes an entire axis. Titles generally define
what kind of data is being shown on that axis. The text of axis titles always displays
horizontally, even for vertical (Y) axes.
Y axis title
X axis title
➤ To add or edit an axis title:
1. Select the axis.
2. Choose the Format Axis menu option. The Format Axis dialog will appear.
3. Choose the Options tab.
4. Edit the text in the Text box, then click OK.
214
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
Axis titles share font and color information with axis labels. You can’t make axis titles
and axis labels look different. For information on changing the color or font of axis
titles and labels, see “Changing Fonts, Font Styles, and Font Colors” on page 219.
About Data Labels
Data labels are text elements that describe individual data points.
■
■
■
■
■
Displaying data labels. You may display data labels for all data points in the chart,
for all data points in a particular series, or for individual data points. For
information, see “Displaying Data Labels” on page 214.
Data label text. Formula One for Java creates the text for the data labels based on
the data in the chart’s data range. After Formula One for Java creates this text,
you may select it and edit it in the chart. For information, see “Editing Data Label
Text” on page 215
Data label alignment. For data labels that have more than one line of text, you may
choose from various text alignment options. For information, see “Aligning Data
Label Text” on page 216
Data label positioning. You may change the position of the data labels relative to
the data point. You may also select individual data labels and move them to any
position on the chart. For information, see “Repositioning Data Labels” on page
217.
Data label lines. You may link data labels to their data points by data label lines.
For information, see “Displaying Data Label Lines” on page 218.
For information on...
See this section
Changing data label fonts and
colors
“Changing Fonts, Font Styles, and Font Colors” on page
219
Changing data label fill colors
“Changing Fill Colors, Patterns, and Gradients” on page
223
Changing data label outlines
“Changing Line Styles and Colors” on page 222
Displaying Data Labels
The first step in displaying data labels is deciding which data points you want to label.
To label...
Select...
Choose menu option...
Choose tab...
All data points in the chart
anything
Format Plot
Data Labels
All data points in a series
the series
Format Series
An individual data point
the data point Format Data Point
Data Labels
Data Labels
Chapter 14 Text and Numbers in Charts
215
The Data Labels Tab
The Data Labels tab, shown below, lets you choose what type of text you want
Formula One for Java to generate and display on the data label. You may edit this text
later.
Click here to remove
the data label(s).
Click here for data
labels that display the
value from the cell in
the chart’s data range
that applies to that data
point.
Click here for data
labels that display the
data point’s category
name.
For bubble charts, click here for labels that display each bubble’s size.
For pie and doughnut charts, click here to display the category name and percent value of each slice.
For pie and doughnut charts, click here to display the percent value of each slice.
When you finish working with the Data Labels tab, click OK to accept the changes or
Cancel to cancel your changes.
Editing Data Label Text
After you have displayed a data label, you may change the text of the data label in one
of two ways: you may change the number format, or you may add to or change the
label text.
Changing the number format. For data labels that show numbers (that is, label types
that display values, percentages, and bubble sizes), you may edit the number formats
by selecting the label, choosing the Format Data Labels option, and clicking on the
Number tab. For more information on number formats, see “Changing Number
Formats” on page 218.
Adding to or changing the label text. For any data labels, you may type in new or
additional text to the text that is automatically displayed. See below.
216
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
➤ To edit the text of a data label:
1. Select the data label you want to change. For information on selecting data labels,
see “Selecting Chart Elements” on page 138.
2. Double-click the selected data label. The Format Data Labels dialog will appear.
Choose the Options tab, shown below.
To edit text for the data
label, first un-check
Automatic.
Enter the data label text
here.
You may change the
position of the data
label by choosing an
option here.
3. Click Apply to see your changes or OK to accept your changes.
Aligning Data Label Text
You can align text in multi-line data labels horizontally and vertically within the
selection handles. The following examples of selected data labels show how the
alignment options change the text alignment within the selection handles.
Horizontal alignment: center
Vertical alignment: center
Horizontal alignment: left
Vertical alignment: top
Horizontal alignment: right
Vertical alignment: center
Horizontal alignment: justify
Vertical alignment: bottom
Note The size of the label element is fixed by Formula One for Java. You may not
change the size of labels by dragging the label selection handles.
➤ To align data label text:
1. Select the series of data labels to align all the text in the series. Select an
individual data label to align its text.
2. Choose the Format Data Labels option and choose the Alignment tab, shown
below.
Chapter 14 Text and Numbers in Charts
217
Select from these
options to align the text
horizontally.
Select from these
options to align the text
vertically.
3. Click Apply to see your changes or OK to accept your changes.
Repositioning Data Labels
After displaying data labels, you may change the position of the labels relative to the
data point. You may reposition data labels for an entire series or you may reposition
individual data labels.
Note To reposition all of the data labels in the chart, reposition each series of data
labels.
➤ To reposition a series of data labels:
1. Select the series of data labels by clicking on one of the labels. See “Selecting
Chart Elements” on page 138 for more information about selecting series data
labels.
2. Choose the Format Data Labels menu option and click the Options tab.
3. In the Position frame, choose a positioning option for the data labels.
4. Click Apply or OK to see your changes.
➤ To reposition an individual data label:
■
You may use the procedure outlined above to reposition an individual data label,
only select the individual label instead of the entire series.
■
You may reposition any data label by dragging it to any position on the chart.
218
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
Displaying Data Label Lines
You may display lines leading from the data point to its label. If you reposition the
data label, the label line will stretch like a rubber band.
After displaying the lines, you may select them and change their color and style. For
information, see “Changing Line Styles and Colors” on page 222.
Data label lines are displayed for all data labels on the chart. You can’t display data
label lines for some data labels and not for others.
➤ To display data label lines:
1. Choose the Plot option from the context menu.
2. Click on the Options tab.
3. In the Options frame, select the Show Label Lines check box.
4. Click Apply to see your changes or OK to accept them.
Changing Number Formats
Number formats are patterns that Formula One for Java uses for displaying numbers.
A date format, for example, might require Formula One for Java to display the data as
3 sets of 2 numbers divided by slashes. Any date with that format follows that pattern.
For more information, see “About Number Formats” on page 64.
Numbers that appear in data labels and in value axis labels can have number formats
applied to them. The first step in changing number formats in charts is to select the
chart element that contains the numbers you want to change.
To change number
formats for...
Select...
Choose menu option...
Choose tab...
Data labels
the label or series of labels
Format Data Labels
Number
Axis labels
the axis
Format Axis
Number
Chapter 14 Text and Numbers in Charts
219
The Number Tab
The Number tab, shown below, lets you change the axis or data label’s number format.
This box lets you create a custom number
format using Formula One for Java’s
format symbols.
The number formats are grouped into
these categories.
The number formats assigned to the
category selected at left will appear here.
Choose the All category to display all of
the number formats here.
When this box is checked, the labels use
the number format assigned to the cells in
the chart’s data range in the worksheet.
You must un-check this box to apply a
different number format in this dialog box.
Any number formats you choose in the Number tab will apply to the chart only if you
un-check the Linked to Current Datasource checkbox.
When you are finished with this dialog box, press OK or Apply to see your changes.
Note For an annotated list of Formula One for Java’s number formats, see “Built-in
Number Formats, by Category” on page 65. For a list of Formula One for Java’s
format symbols, see “Creating Custom Number Formats” on page 67.
Changing Fonts, Font Styles, and Font Colors
The first step in changing fonts, font styles, and font colors is to select the chart
element that contains the text you want to change.
To change fonts for...
Select...
Choose menu option...
Choose tab...
Axis labels
the axis
Format Axis
Font
Axis titles
the axis
Format Axis
Font
Chart title
anything
Title
Font
Data label (individual)
the data label
Format Data Labels
Font
Data labels (for a series)
the series
Format Data Labels
Font
Legend
anything
Legend
Font
Please note that the axis title and axis labels share the same font characteristics. You
cannot make the axis title a different color, size, or font than the axis labels.
220
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
The Font Tab
The Font tab, shown below, lets you change the font and its style, size, and color. It
also lets you add strikeout bars and underlines.
The fonts installed on your
system will appear here.
Click Automatic to set the
text to your system’s
window text color.
These style settings may
not be available for all
fonts.
When you finish working with the Font tab, click OK to accept the changes or Cancel
to cancel out your changes.
Setting Fonts for the Entire Chart
To set font characteristics for all the text that will appear in the chart (all titles, all
labels, and the legend), select the Format Chart menu option and click the Font tab.
The tab will appear as shown above. Make your changes and click OK.
Caution The font settings you create in the Font tab of the Format Chart dialog apply
to all text in the chart. Font settings on the Format Chart dialog will override any font
settings you previously made to individual chart parts.
221
C H A P T E R
1 5
Colors in Charts
This chapter shows how to change the colors of chart elements and their outlines. The
following topics are covered.
■
“Changing Line Styles and Colors” on page 222
■
“Changing Fill Colors, Patterns, and Gradients” on page 223
■
“About Markers” on page 225
■
“Automatically Varying Data Point Colors” on page 227
Other topics related to colors in charts but not documented in this chapter are:
■
“Changing Fonts, Font Styles, and Font Colors” on page 219
■
“Setting Up the Color Palette” on page 22
222
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
Changing Line Styles and Colors
You can change the styles, colors, and widths of the lines, such as axes and grid lines,
that appear on charts. You can also change the colors and widths of lines that are
drawn around chart elements like the title and the legend.
The first step in changing line styles and colors is deciding which lines you want to
change.
To change the style or
color of...
Select...
Axis
Chart outline
Choose menu option...
Choose tab...
the axis
Format Axis
Line Style
anything
Format Chart
Line Style
Data label outline
the data label(s)
Format Data Labels
Line Style
Data point outline
the data point(s)
Format Data Point
Line Style
Drop lines
the drop lines
Format Drop Lines
Line Style
High-low lines
the high-low lines
Format High-Low Lines
Line Style
Legend outline
anything
Format Legend
Line Style
Major grid lines
the major grid lines
Format Grid Lines
Line Style
Minor grid lines
the minor grid lines
Format Grid Lines
Line Style
Open-close bars
the open or close bars
Format Open-Close Bars
Line Style
Plot outline
anything
Format Plot
Line Style
Title outline
anything
Format Title
Line Style
For information on selecting chart elements, see “Selecting Chart Elements” on page
138.
Chapter 15 Colors in Charts
223
The Line Style Tab
The Line Style tab, shown below, lets you change the width, style, and color of the
line(s) you selected.
Click here to apply the color set by your operating
system for line objects
Click here to hide the line.
Click here to make a solid (non-dash) line of the color
selected in the palette.
Click here to make a dashed line of the color selected
in the palette. Choose the style of dashes from the
drop-down listbox.
If you chose the Solid or Dash option, you may choose
a color for your line by clicking on a color in the
palette.
A sample line showing the color, dash option, and
weight you chose appears here.
If you chose the Solid or Dash option, you can make the line a specific weight by typing in a value. Or choose a
value by clicking the up and down buttons. The higher the line weight, the thicker the line.
When you finish making changes, click Apply to see your changes or OK to accept
your changes.
Changing Fill Colors, Patterns, and Gradients
You can change the color that fills many different chart elements. You can also fill
chart elements with a two-color pattern or with a gradient, an effect in which one
color fades into another color.
The first step in changing a chart element’s fill color, pattern, or gradient is to decide
which chart element’s fill color you want to change.
To change the fill color,
pattern, or gradient of...
Select...
Choose menu option...
Choose tab...
Chart
anything
Format Chart
Fill Area
Data label(s)
the data label(s)
Format Data Labels
Fill Area
A data point
the data point
Format Data Point
Fill Area
A series of data points
the series
Format Series
Fill Area
Legend
anything
Format Legend
Fill Area
Open-close bars
the open or close bars
Format Open-Close Bars
Fill Area
Plot
anything
Format Plot
Fill Area
Title
anything
Format Title
Fill Area
224
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
For information on selecting chart elements, see “Selecting Chart Elements” on page
138. For information on changing fill colors for markers, see “About Markers” on
page 225.
The Fill Area Tab
The Fill Area tab, shown below, lets you change the color that fills the chart
element(s) you selected. It also lets you fill that element with a pattern or a gradient.
These frame titles change depending on
whether Solid, Pattern, or Gradient is selected.
Click here to fill the
selected element with the
preset system color.
Click here to let the color of
the element below the
elected one show through.
Click here to fill the
selected element with the
color in the lefthand
palette.
Click here to fill the
selected element with the
pattern you choose in the
drop-down box. Choose a
background color from the
lefthand palette and a
pattern color from the
righthand palette.
A sample of the fill color, pattern, or gradient you selected appears here.
Click here to fill the selected element with the gradient you choose from the dropdown box. Choose the starting color from the lefthand palette and the ending color
from the righthand palette.
When you finish making changes, click Apply to see your changes or OK to accept
your changes.
Chapter 15 Colors in Charts
225
About Markers
Markers are small symbols that appear directly on top of data points in line and XY
charts and on line series in combination charts. You cannot display markers on any
other chart types. Markers are often used on stock charts to show the stock’s opening
and closing prices.
markers
You can choose from 10 different styles of markers. The styles are:
Circle
Square
Diamond
Standard Deviation
Dow Jones
Star
Down Triangle
Triangle
Plus
X
You can display or hide markers. You can choose the style, size, and background and
foreground colors of displayed markers.
The first step in editing a marker is to decide which marker(s) you want to edit.
To edit...
Select...
One marker
the data point Format Data Point
All markers for a series of data points the series
Choose menu option... Choose tab...
Format Series
Markers
Markers
For information on selecting data points and series, see “Selecting Chart Elements” on
page 138.
226
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
The Markers tab
The Markers tab, shown below, lets you edit markers.
Automatic markers are
diamonds 5 points wide with
a black outline and white fill
color.
Enter a size for the marker,
in points
Choose the style of marker.
To hide the marker(s),
choose None.
The foreground color is the
color of the marker’s outline.
The background color is the
fill color for the marker.
When you are finished editing markers, press Apply to see your changes or OK to
accept your changes.
Chapter 15 Colors in Charts
227
Automatically Varying Data Point Colors
By default, Formula One for Java displays all of a series’ data points in the same
color. This means that all data points on charts with a single series appear in the same
color.
You may automatically vary the colors of bars and lines on charts within one series so
that each bar or each line between data points appears in a different color. When you
make this change, the colors of the data points automatically change. The legend also
changes to show the new colors and the category names instead of the series color and
series name.
A chart with colors assigned to series (the
default).
The same chart after automatically
varying the data point colors. Note the
legend now displays the new colors and
the category names.
This option only works for charts with one series.
This option is only available on charts where series appear as bars and lines. That is,
this option is available on column, line, and bar charts, on column and line series in
combination charts, and on XY charts that display lines between the data points.
The colors displayed on data points are the automatic system colors for charts.
➤ To automatically vary data point colors in a series:
1. Select the Format Plot menu option from the context menu.
2. Click on the Options tab.
3. In the Options frame, select the Vary Colors check box.
4. Click Apply to see your changes or OK to accept your changes.
228
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
Special Notes About Varying Data Point Colors
Other ways to change data point colors. You may select individual data points and
change their colors. You may do this whether the series colors are varied or not. For
more information about changing data point colors, see “Changing Fill Colors,
Patterns, and Gradients” on page 223.
Changing the chart type. If you choose the Vary Colors option and then change the
chart type, the color change you made is ignored and the series will revert to the
default colors.
Adding a series. If you choose the Vary Colors option and then add a series to the
chart, the color change you made will be ignored and each series will revert to its
default color.
Pie and doughnut charts. On pie and doughnut charts, Formula One for Java’s color
default is exactly the opposite of the other charts’ color default: It automatically varies
the series colors. This is because each series is plotted as one pie or doughnut on the
chart. If one color applied to each series, each pie or doughnut would be all one color.
Therefore, for pie and doughnut charts, changing the Vary Colors check box has
exactly the opposite effect as described here. For more information, see “About
Doughnut Charts” on page 163 and “About Pie Charts” on page 169.
229
Glossary
active
A cell(s) or other object selected and in a state to interact with a user.
API
Application Programming Interface. How a programmer accesses the
behavior and state of classes and objects.
applet
A Java program distributed as an attachment in an HTML document
and executed in a Java-enabled web browser. Includes a GUI and runs
in the JVM on a client machine.
application
Sometimes “stand-alone application.” A program designed to run on its
own--not within or as part of another program.
area chart
A type of chart that defines the space between the horizontal axis and a
straight or bent line, often used to emphasize the relative importance of
values over a period of time.
arrays
Data in lists or tables of values.
AWT
Abstract Windowing Toolkit. A set of Java development tools for
creating GUI’s.
axis
The baseline of a chart that establishes what things are being compared.
axis label
Text that marks major intervals on a chart axis. Labels may indicate
values or categories.
axis title
A title that applies to an entire axis on a chart. Titles generally define
what kind of data is being shown on that axis.
bar chart
A type of chart that shows each piece of data as a horizontal bar.
bar gap ratio
For column and bar charts, the ratio of the space between the bars
within a category and the width of the bars themselves.
bubble chart
A type of chart that allows users to show a visual comparison using
three coordinates.
CAB files
CABinet files. Signed versions of JAR files.
category
A class of information on a chart into which data from different series
is sorted.
category axis
A type of chart axis that shows the different categories being compared.
class path
Directions to the address of a .class or JAR file.
column chart
A type of chart that shows each piece of data as a vertical column.
combination chart
A type of chart that combines elements of various chart types. Each
series on a combination chart can be displayed as columns, lines,
areas, or steps.
230
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
component
A generic programming object: part of or a module from a larger
program that serves a particular purpose or provides a particular
functionality. In Java, JavaBeans, applets and servlets are components.
context menu
The menu that appears when you right-click a chart or a chart element.
customizer
Public Interface Customizer. Provides information and instructions to a
Java Bean to customize its GUI.
data label
Text that marks a data point in a chart.
data point
One piece of data in a chart. For example: On a bar chart, a data point
is a bar. On a line chart, a data point is a bend in the line. On a pie
chart, a data point is a slice of the pie.
data range
In charting, the range of cells on a worksheet containing the data that is
plotted on a chart. When the data in the data range changes, the chart
changes automatically.
database
An organized set(s) of data, usually stored as records.
design time
The period during which the programmer is using an IDE to develop an
application.
doughnut chart
A type of chart that shows different series of data as concentric
doughnuts. Slices of the doughnuts represent data point values.
drop line
A line drawn on a line chart from a data point to the category axis to
more clearly show the exact position of the data point.
event
A notification of change that happens within a program.
field
Part of a record in which an item of data is stored. In a database, one
column typically contains one field.
Formula One for Java Formula One for Java Version 7.0
garbage collection
The automatic detection and freeing of memory no longer in use.
grid line
A line that marks a major or minor interval on a chart. Grid lines cross
the chart’s plot area, extending from a tick mark on a chart axis.
GUI
Graphical User Interface. The use of images in concert with the
keyboard or mouse to provide the user access to the functions of a
program.
high-low line
A line drawn for each category on a line chart between the highest data
point in a category and the lowest data point in that same category.
HTML
HyperText Markup Language. A file format for hypertext documents on
the Internet.
IDE
Interactive Development Environment. A software development
system. Usually includes an editor, graphical tools, and compiler.
InfoBus
Software developed by that provides interfaces and protocols that
enable applets to exchange data--an “Information Bus.”
instance or
instantiation
A single iteration of a program object.
J2SDK
JavaTM 2 SDK, Standard Edition, v 1.2. Software used to develop Java
programs.
Glossary
231
JAR files
Java ARchive files. A compressed file format that combines many files
into one.
JavaBean
Also Java Bean. A portable, reusable, platform-independent component
used within another application or applet.
JDBC
Java Database Connectivity. An API for database access that allows
database-independent connectivity.
JDK 1.0.x or 1.1.x
Java Development Kit version 1.0.x or 1.1.x (JDKTM 1.x.x). Software
used to develop Java programs.
JFC
Java Foundation Classes. Includes Swing components and other
features used to create GUIs.
JRE
Java Runtime Environment. Includes the JVM, core class files and
other files. Allows end users to run programs written in Java.
JVM
Java Virtual Machine. The part of the Java Runtime Environment (JRE)
that interprets bytecodes. Required to run programs written in Java.
legend
A table on a chart listing the chart’s series and showing the colors
and/or markers corresponding to each. On pie and doughnut charts,
legends list categories, not series.
line chart
A type of chart that shows the changes in data with a fluctuating line.
major interval
The main set of units into which a chart axis is divided. Ticks, grid
lines, and axis labels appear at major intervals.
marker
An asterisk-style character that can be used to identify data points on
line and XY charts.
minor interval
The secondary set of units into which a chart value axis is divided.
Minor intervals appear between major intervals and are marked by ticks
and grid lines but not by axis labels.
MRJ
Macintosh Runtime for Java. Java implementation for the Apple
Macintosh computer
open-close bar
A bar drawn for each category on a line chart between the data point in
the first chart series and the data point in the last chart series.
pie chart
A type of chart that shows each series of data as a circle cut into slices
representing data point values.
platform
A functioning combination of computer hardware and software
operating system.
plot
The main area of a chart that shows the axes, data points, data labels,
ticks, grid lines, etc. Charts with studies display the main chart and the
study in the same plot.
range
A nomenclature to specify cells within a worksheet.
record
Analogous to a row in a worksheet, an ordered set of fields within a
database.
RSA
An key-based encryption system. RSA stands for Rivest, Shamir and
Adleman, who developed the system.
run time
The period when a program is loaded in memory and operating.
232
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
second Y axis
An axis drawn on the right side of a chart, parallel to the primary Y
axis. Second Y axes can be used to plot selected chart series against a
different set of values.
selected
Cell(s) or object(s) made active.
series
A class of information that is being compared on a chart. Series are
often grouped into categories.
servlet
A component that is executed by the web server’s JVM and provides
server-side access to resources to the client. Servlets have no GUI.
SQL
“Structured Query Language.” A language used in developing,
maintaining, and querying relational databases and systems.
stack
A method of displaying cumulative data on a chart. In a stacked column
chart, each series is displayed as a band of color on a column. The
heights of the columns represent the cumulative values of all data
points in that column.
step chart
A type of chart that displays each data point as a stair step in a series of
stair steps.
stock chart
A type of chart that displays stock market data. Stock charts usually
show the range of prices of a stock over a period of time.
string
A sequence of characters or words, etc.
study
A sub-chart drawn below the main chart on the same plot. Each subchart has its own Y axis. Studies are usually used to compare dissimilar
data.
Swing
Also Swing set. An API that contains components to develop a GUI in
Java that do not rely on “native code.” Using Swing, the GUI looks the
same on all platforms, or can be set to emulate the GUI of its current
environment.
threads, threading
Program instructions that run independently of the program that creates
them.
tick
A short line on a chart axis that marks major and minor intervals. For
category axes, ticks separate each category. For value axes, ticks show
different values.
value axis
An axis that displays numbers as values or percents.
view
Directions for a custom graphical instantiation of a software program.
workbook
A collection of worksheets within a file.
Workbook Designer
The GUI of Formula One for Java where user operations (entry of data,
formulas, calculations, etc.) are carried out.
worksheet
Also known as a spreadsheet, a table of values ordered in rows and
columns.
X gap ratio
For column and bar charts, the ratio of the space between categories
and the width of the bars themselves.
XY (scatter) chart
A type of chart that plots two sets of numbers as one series of XY
coordinates.
233
Index
A
About Formula One for Java command (Help menu) 17
Absolute cell references 50
Active cell 34
moving 35
Active worksheet 26
Adjacent (X) option 208
Adjacent axis crosses at category number option 203
Adjacent axis intersects at maximum category option 203
Aligning
chart title text 130
data 73
data label text 216–217
headers and footers 122
API documentation 4
Arc button 18
Arc command (Insert menu) 14, 98
Arcs
creating 18, 98
formatting 102
moving, sizing, and arranging 109–110
Area charts 152
axes on 192
combining with other chart types 160
data as percentages 188–190
stacking 187–188
Arrow keys 32, 35
Arrows, on line objects 101
Ascending Sort button 18
Autofill lists 54–55
dragging for filling 87
Automatic Layout option, in charts 150
Automatic recalculation 60
Axis 191–209
color of 222
formatting multiple 209
hiding 196
intersection 202–203
logarithmic 204
order of categories and values 203–204
redisplay hidden 196
second Y 205–206
selecting 139
See also Category axis, Value axis
Axis labels 137, 196–198
and axis intersection 203
changing 184–185
Axis labels (continued)
displaying 197–198
editing 196
for category axes 147
for value axes 197
hidden 198
numbers in 147, 218–219
order of 203–204
with data plotted as percentages 190
Axis scale 193–195
and bubble charts 157
and stacked charts 188
settings 193
with data plotted as percentages 190
Axis titles 137, 213–214
B
Bar charts 158–160
axes on 192
bar spacing in 158–159
bars as lines in 160
combining with other chart types 160
data as percentages 188–190
stacking 187–188
varying colors of data points 227
Bar gap ratio 159, 188
Bar spacing, in column and bar charts 158–160
Bold button 19
Borders
around a workbook 21
on cells 57, 80–81
Bring to Front command (Format menu) 16, 110
Bubble charts 153–157
axes on 192
bubbles extending off the plot 157
labelling the bubbles 156
overlapping bubbles 156
sizing the bubbles 155, 185
Button button 19
Button command (Insert menu) 15, 98
Buttons
creating 19, 98
formatting 106
moving, sizing, and arranging 109–110
234
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
C
Calculating worksheets 60–62
Cancel Insert Object command (Insert menu) 15, 98
Cascade command (Window menu) 16
Categories in reverse order option 204
Categories, in charts 136, 147–149
and series 181–182
in doughnut charts 163
in pie charts 169
names of 185
Category axis 137, 192
axis scale of 193, 194
hiding, on a chart with study 208
intersection of 202–203
labels in 147, 196–198
changing 184–185
numbered 147
order of categories 203–204
Cell reference, in formula bar 21, 48
Cells
active 34
aligning data in 73
attributes of 86
borders on 80, 81
clearing 94
color in 79
copying 86
deleting 93
edit mode 37
entering data in 32
formatting 63–84
inserting 93
moving 86
navigating with the keyboard 35
pasting 86
protecting 32
range of 34
references to 49–53
selecting 34–35
Cells command (Format menu) 15, 56, 58, 64, 67, 72, 73,
79, 80
Cells command (Insert menu) 14, 93
Center Across button 20
Center Align button 20
Chart command (Insert Menu) 14
Chart Data dialog 183
Chart types 127
changing 126
Charts 125–228
categories in 136, 147–149
colors in 221–228
creating 126
Charts (continued)
data display options in 179–190
data ranges 126, 145–149, 182–185
default 126
deleting 133
dialog boxes for formatting 143
elements of 136–138
fill color of 223
fonts on 219–220
moving 132
moving elements 141
number formats in 218
outline of 222
printing 133
selecting elements of 138–140
selecting the chart object 139
series in 136, 147–149
sizing 132
sizing elements 141
studies in 138, 206–208
types of 126
undoing formatting 149–150
See also names of chart types
Check box button 19
Check boxes
creating 19, 98
formatting 104
moving, sizing, and arranging 109–110
Checkbox command (Insert menu) 15, 98
Circular references, solving 61
Clear All command (Edit menu) 13, 94
Clear Contents command (Edit menu) 13, 94
Clear Formats command (Edit menu) 13, 94
Clear Print Area command (File menu) 12
Clear Print Titles command (File menu) 12
Clearing cells 94
Clipboard 86
Close command (File menu) 12
Color button 20
Color palette, setting up 22
Colors
automatic 79, 80
in charts 221–228
in custom number formats 70
in fonts 72
in worksheets and cells 78–81
printing 119
setting up the color palette 22
Column Autofit Selection command (Format menu) 15, 75
Column charts 158–160
as stock charts 172
axes on 192
bar spacing in 158–159
Index
Column charts (continued)
columns as lines in 160
combining with other chart types 160
data as percentages 188–190
stacking 187–188
Column Default Width command (Format menu) 15, 74
Column headings 81–82
allowing users to enter 32
displaying 31
naming 38
printing 119
selecting 39
Column Hide command (Format menu) 15
Column Unhide command (Format menu) 15
Column Width command (Format menu) 15, 75
Columns
chart series in 147–149, 183
deleting 93
formatting headings of 81–82
freezing 78
inserting 93
print titles 116
selecting 35, 38
setting widths of 32, 73–77
Columns command (Insert menu) 14
Combination charts 160–162
and studies 175
axes on 192
Command prompt, to run the Workbook Designer 11
Commas, in number formats 68
Common Fixed and General Formats button 20
Conditional values, in number formats 70
Constant values, entering 43–44
Contents and Index command (Help menu) 17
Context menu 142
Copy button 17
Copy Cell Format command (Edit menu) 13, 90
Copy command (Edit menu) 12, 89, 90
Copy Format button 17
Copying
data 86–90
formatting 89
Crosses At option 202
CTRL key 99
Currency button 20
Currency, formatting numbers as 65
Custom number formats 67–71
Cut button 17
Cut command (Edit menu) 12, 89, 90, 111
D
Data
aligning 73
entering and changing 36–37
finding and replacing 90–93
formatting 63–84
imported from a database 95
number formats for 64–71
sorting 94, 95
types of 42
validating 56
Data and Time Format button 20
Data entry 36, 48–57
constant values and 43–44
formulas and 44–62
multi-line 49
Data label lines 218
Data labels 137, 214–218
aligning text of 216–217
displaying 214
editing text in 215
fill color of 223
in bubble charts 156
in doughnut charts 165
in pie charts 171
in XY (scatter) charts 177
moving 141, 217
outline of 222
selecting 139
sizing 141
Data points 136, 180
as percentages 188–190
changing value of 146
colors of 223–224, 227–228
hidden 186–187
labelling 214–218
markers on 225–226
not displaying 152, 162, 171
outline of 222
selecting 139
in area charts 152
in step charts 171
series of 180–181
stacking 187–188
Data ranges, in charts 126, 145–149
changing 182–185
changing values in 146
for bubble charts 153–155
for high-low charts 173
for open-high-low-close charts 174
for stock charts 173–175
for XY (scatter) charts 176–177
235
236
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
Data ranges, in charts (continued)
headings in 145, 147
series and categories in 147–149
spaceholder cell in 146
Dates
entering 43
formatting 66, 68–70
printed in headers and footers 122
Default
autofill lists 54
chart 126, 150
column width 74
font 16
look and feel 22
row height 74
worksheet protection 58
Default Font command (Format menu) 16
Delete command (Edit menu) 13, 93
Delete key 32, 37
Delete Object command (Edit menu) 111
Delete Sheet command (Edit menu) 13
Deleting
cells 93
charts 133
graphical objects 111
worksheets 33
Descending Sort button 18
Designer Help 4, 17
Digit placeholders, in number formats 67
Displaying
formulas 30
items in the Workbook Designer 21
items on worksheets 30
zero values 30
#DIV/0! error message 62
Documentation xiii
API 4
conventions xiv
PDF files of 4
Dollar sign 43, 50
in number formats 68
Doughnut charts 163–165
and the vary colors option 228
exploding the slices 164–165
labelling doughnuts 165
legends in 163
order of doughnuts 163
sizing the hole 163–164
start angle of slices 164
Drag-and-drop
filling from autofill lists using 87
for copying and moving data 87
Drawing and Forms button 18
Drawing and Forms Toolbar 18
Drawing and Forms Toolbar command (View menu) 14
Drawing graphical objects 98
Drop lines 137, 166–167
color of 222
selecting 139
Dropdown list box button 19
Dropdown list boxes
creating 19, 98
formatting 102
moving, sizing, and arranging 109–110
Dropdown Listbox command (Insert menu) 15, 98
E
Edit menu, in Workbook Designer 12
Edit mode 38, 48
Enable Protection command (Format menu) 15, 59
End key 35
ENTER key 32, 37, 59
Entering data in worksheets 36
Error messages
#DIV/0! 62
#N/A 62
#NAME? 62
#NULL! 62
#NUM! 62
#REF! 62
#VALUE! 62
and locked cells 59
creating, with validation formulas 56
Errors
entering 44
worksheet formula 62
Escape key 37
Examples
of custom number formats 71
of freezing panes 77
of sorting 95
See also names of chart types
Excel
compatibility xvi, 38
graphical object compatibility 111
password-protected files 38
Exit command (File menu) 12
Explosion percent
in doughnut charts 164–165
in pie charts 170
Index
F
F2 key 37, 48
F9 key 37
File menu, in Workbook Designer 12
Files, Formula One for Java 4
Fill Color button 20
Fill Down command (Edit menu) 13
Fill Right command (Edit menu) 13
Find and replace 90–93
Find button 17
Find command (Edit menu) 13, 91
Find dialog box 90
Fixing rows and columns. See Freezing panes
Fonts 72
codes, for headers and footers 122
on charts 219–220
Footers, printing 121
Format Axis dialog 142, 143
Format button 89
Format Chart dialog 143
Format Data Labels dialog 142, 143
Format Data Point dialog 142, 143
Format Drop Lines dialog 142, 144
Format Grid Lines dialog 142, 144
Format High-Low Lines dialog 142, 144
Format Label Lines dialog 142, 144
Format Legend dialog 144
Format menu, in Workbook Designer 15
Format Open-Close Bars dialog 142, 144
Format Plot dialog 144
Format Series dialog 145
Format Title dialog 145
Formats 86
Formatting
cells 63–84
charts 126–228
column widths 73–77
copying from cell to cell 89
creating custom number formats 67–71
fonts 72
graphical objects 99–108
headers and footers 122
numbers 64–71
row and column headings 81–82
row heights 73–77
Formatting Toolbar 19
Formatting Toolbar command (View menu) 14
Formula bar 21, 48
Formula Bar command (View menu) 13, 48
Formula One for Java
documentation xiii
features xv–xvi
file extension (VTS) 37
file formats compatible with 37
files 4
installing 5
obtaining 4
version number 17
Formulas
allowing entry of 32
and worksheet recalculation 60
cell references in 49–53
displaying 30, 58
entering 44–62
errors in 62
finding and replacing 90
in cells 86
validation 57
Fraction Format button 20
Fractions, formatting numbers as 66
Freeze Panes command (Format menu) 15, 78
Freezing panes 77–78
Function Reference xiii
Functions 47
G
General number format 64, 65
GIF files, inserting 107
Goto command (Edit menu) 13
Gradient fills, in charts 224
Graphical objects
arranging layers of 110
compatibility with Excel 111
creating 98
deleting 111
formatting 99–108
identifying 108
moving 39, 109
naming 109
selecting 36, 39, 99
sizing 39, 110
> (greater than), in documentation xiv
Grid lines 137, 201–202
and axis scale 195
color of 222
displaying 31
printing 119
selecting 139
237
238
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
H
K
Headers, printing 121
Headings
in the chart data range 145, 147
See also Row headings, Column headings
Help
displaying 17
files 4
Formula One for Java Designer help 18
Help button 18
Help menu, in Workbook Designer 17
High-low charts 173
High-low lines 138, 166
color of 222
selecting 139
Home key 35
HTML files, opening and saving 38
Keyboard
commands 36
navigating and selecting cells using 35
Keys, for sorting 94
I
Identifying graphical objects 108
Index list of worksheets 29
Insert Chart button 18
Insert menu, Workbook Designer 14
Insert Picture button 18
Inserting
cells 93
charts 126
columns 93
GIF files 107
graphical objects 98
JPG files 107
rows 93
worksheets 27–28
Installing Formula One for Java 5
Intersection, of axes 202–203
Italic button 19
Iteration 61
J
Japanese locale 69
Java
Software Developers Kit (SDK) 5
Virtual Machine (JVM) 11
Javadoc API documentation 4
JavaHelp 4
JPG files, inserting 107
L
Label lines 138
selecting 140
Labels. See Data labels, Axis labels
Left Align button 20
Legends 131–132, 136
adding 131
fill color of 223
formatting options 132
in bubble charts 154
in doughnut charts 163
in pie charts 169
in XY (scatter) charts 176
moving 131, 141
outline of 222
selecting 140
sizing 132, 141
text in 132, 147, 184–185, 227–228
Length Ratio option 208
Licensing Formula One for Java 4
Line button 18
Line charts 166–168
as stock charts 172
axes on 192
combining with other chart types 160
data as percentages 188–190
stacking 187–188
varying colors of data points 227
Line command (Insert menu) 14, 98
Line feeds, cell entries and 49
Lines
creating 18, 98
creating arrows on 101
formatting 100
in charts
in bar and column charts 160
in combination charts 160
in XY (scatter) charts 175, 177
moving, sizing, and arranging 109–110
Linked to Current Datasource option 219
Locking cells 58
Logarithmic value axes 204
Logical values, entering 44
Look and feel 22
Index
M
Major divisions, on chart axis 193, 195
Major grid lines 201
Major Grid option 201
Major ticks 199
Margins, setting 120
Markers, in charts 137, 225–226
in line charts 166
in open-high-low-close charts 174
in XY (scatter) charts 175
Markers, type 57
Maximum option, on chart axis 193
Menus, in Workbook Designer 12–17
Minimum option, on chart axis 193
Minor divisions, on chart axis 193, 195
Minor grid lines 201
Minor Grid option 201
Minor ticks 199
Model/View/Controller architecture xv
Mouse
actions of 38
entering cell references with 50
selecting cells with 34–35
Move Ranges by Dragging checkbox 88
Moving
active cell 35
chart elements 141
charts 132
data 88
drag-and drop for 87
menu commands for 89
graphical objects 109
Multi-line data entry 49, 73
N
#N/A error message 62
Name command (Insert menu) 14, 54
#NAME? error message 62
Names
defining 54
for graphical objects 109
for worksheets 29, 38
in headers and footers 122
Navigating in worksheets 38
Negative numbers 43
New button 17
New command (File menu) 12
New Window command (Window menu) 16
#NULL! error message 62
#NUM! error message 62
Number formats in charts 218
239
Number of categories between labels option 194
Number of categories between ticks option 194
Numbers
as constant values 43, 44
as currency 65
as dates 66
as fractions 66
as percentages 66, 68
as times 66, 69
converted from text 45
formats for 64–71
in charts 218–219
in scientific notation 66, 68
O
Object command (Format menu) 16, 100, 101, 102, 103,
105, 106, 108, 109
Objects. See Graphical objects
Open button 17
Open command (File menu) 12
Open-close bars 138, 167–168
fill color of 223
outline of 222
selecting 140
Open-high-low-close charts 173, 174
Options command (Tools menu) 16, 21, 22, 55, 60, 61
Oval button 18
Oval command (Insert menu) 14, 98
Ovals
creating 18, 98
formatting 102
moving, sizing, and arranging 109–110
P
Page Break command (Insert menu) 14, 117
Page breaks 117
Page Down key 35
Page number, in headers and footers 122
Page Setup command (File menu) 12, 118, 119, 120
Page Up key 35
Panes 77
Paste button 17
Paste command (Edit menu) 12, 89
Paste Special command (Edit menu) 13, 90
Percent option, in charts 188–190
in line charts 168
Percent signs 43, 44
Percentage Format button 20
Percentages, formatting numbers as 66, 68
Picture command (Insert menu) 14
240
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
Picture Object command (Insert menu) 98
Picture objects
creating 18, 98
inserting images in 107
moving, sizing, and arranging 109–110
Pie charts 169–171
and the vary colors option 228
exploding the slices 170
labelling pies 171
legends in 169
order of pies 171
sizing the pies 169
start angle of slices 170
Plot Series on Axis option 208
Plots 136
and chart studies 207
fill color of 223
moving 141
outline of 222
selecting 140
sizing 141
+ (plus sign), in documentation xiv
Polygon button 19
Polygon command (Insert menu) 14, 98
Polygon point editing 107
Polygon Point Editing button 19
Polygon Points command (Edit menu) 13, 107
Polygons
creating 19, 98
formatting 19, 102, 107
moving, sizing, and arranging 109–110
reshaping 107
Preferences command (Edit menu) 13
Preferences, setting 22
Print area 116
Print button 17
Print command (File menu) 12, 114
Printing
headers and footers 121
page breaks 117
setting margins 120
setting print area 116
titles 116
worksheets 114
Protecting cells 32, 58
Ranges (continued)
references to 46
selecting and moving 39
Reading workbooks 37
Recalculate command (Tools menu) 16
Recalculation 60–62
automatic 60
function key for 37
Rectangle button 19
Rectangle command (Insert menu) 15, 98
Rectangles
creating 19, 98
formatting 102
moving, sizing, and arranging 109–110
Redo button 18
Redo command (Edit menu) 12
#REF! error message 62
References, solving circular 61
Relative cell references 50
Remove Page Break command (Insert menu) 117
Replace command (Edit menu) 13, 91
Replace dialog box 91
Reset entire chart to defaults option 150
Right Align button 20
Row Default Height command (Format menu) 15, 74
Row headings 81–82
allowing users to enter 32
displaying 31
naming 38
printing 119
selecting 39
Row Height command (Format menu) 15, 74
Row Hide command (Format menu) 15
Row Unhide command (Format menu) 15
Rows
chart series in 147–149, 183
deleting 93
formatting headings of 81–82
freezing 78
inserting 93
print titles 116
selecting 33, 35, 38
setting heights of 32, 73–77
Rows command (Insert menu) 14, 93
Running the Workbook Designer 11
R
S
Ranges 34
allowing dragging of 32
filling 54
pasting to 86
Save As command (File menu) 12
Save button 17
Save command (File menu) 12
Saving workbooks 37
file formats for 37–38
Index
Scatter charts. See XY (scatter) charts
Scientific notation, formatting numbers as 66, 68
Scroll bars, displaying 31
Searching for data 90–93
Second Y axis 205–206
and stacked series 188
on a study 207
Select All Objects command (Edit menu) 13, 99
Selecting 34–36
allowing and disallowing 33
and the chart context menu 142
cells 34–35
chart elements 138–140
columns 38
entire worksheet 38
graphical objects 36, 39, 99
ranges 34–35
row and column headings 36
rows 38
rows and columns 35
using the mouse 38
worksheets 26
Send to Back command (Format menu) 16, 110
Series type, in combination charts 161–162
Series, in charts 136, 147–149, 180–181
adding 184–185
and categories 181–182
deleting 184–185
fill color of 223
hidden 186–187
in combination charts 161–162
in doughnut charts 163
in pie charts 169
labelling 214–218
markers on 225–226
names for 147, 184
on studies 208
open-close bars on 167, 174
order of 186–187
plotting as percentages 168, 188–190
selecting 140
stacking 187–188
vary colors within 227–228
Set Print Area command (File menu) 12, 116
Set Print Titles command (File menu) 12, 116
Sheet Properties command (Format menu) 15, 30, 32, 78
SHIFT key 37
Shift key 59, 99
Show bar as line option 160, 167, 175
Show Label Lines option 218
Sizing
chart elements 141
charts 132
columns 73–77
graphical objects 39, 110
rows 73–77
Solaris
installing Formula One for Java on 5
running the Workbook Designer on 11
Sort command (Edit menu) 13, 94
Sorting data 94
Spaceholder cell 146
Stacking series in charts 187–188
in line charts 168
with data plotted as percentages 189
Standard Toolbar 17
Standard Toolbar command (View menu) 13
Start angle
in doughnut charts 164
in pie charts 170
Step charts 171–172
axes on 192
combining with other chart types 160
data as percentages 188–190
stacking 187–188
Stock charts 172–175
and studies 206
combination charts as 161
Strings, finding and replacing 90
Studies, in charts 138, 206–208
and stacked series 188
displaying series on 208
in combination charts 161
in stock charts 172
number of 207
quick guide for creating 207
size of 208
T
TAB key 32, 37, 59
Tabs, worksheet 21
Technical Guide xiii
Text
entering 43
finding and replacing 90
Ticks 137, 199–200
and axis scale 195
Tile command (Window menu) 16
Tile Horizontal command (Window menu) 16
Tile Vertical command (Window menu) 16
241
242
Formula One for Java User’s Guide
Times
entering 43
formatting numbers as 66, 69
printed in headers and footers 122
Titles, in charts 129–130, 136
aligning text of 130
editing 129
fill color of 223
formatting options 130
moving 141
outline of 222
selecting 140
sizing 141
Toolbars 17–20
Tools menu, in Workbook Designer 16
TXT files, opening and saving 37
Type markers 21, 57
U
Underline button 20
Undo 23
button 18
command 12
Undo command (Edit menu) 12
URL, inserting pictures with 107
Use Weighting check box 165, 169
User’s Guide xiii
V
Validating data 56
Value axis 137, 192
axis scale of 193, 195
intersection of 202–203
labels in 196–198
number formats 218–219
order of values 203–204
with data plotted as percentages 190
#VALUE! error message 62
Values 42–44, 86
finding and replacing 90
Values in reverse order option 204
Vary Colors option 227–228
in doughnut charts 165
in pie charts 171
View menu, in Workbook Designer 13
Views 10–11
settings retrieved from workbooks 37
Volume charts, in stock charts 173, 174–175
VTS files, opening and saving 37
W
Windows 95, 98, NT
installing Formula One for Java on 5
running the Workbook Designer on 11
Windows command (Window menu) 16
Workbook Designer
displaying parts of 21
Edit menu in 12
File menu in 12
Format menu in 15
Help menu in 17
illustration of 10
Insert menu in 14
keyboard commands 36
menus 12–17
mouse actions 38
running 11
toolbars 17–20
Tools menu in 16
View menu in 13
Workbooks
deleting worksheets from 33
description of 10
index list of worksheets in 29
inserting worksheets in 27–28
manipulating 26
reading 37
saving 37
selecting worksheets in 26
writing 37
Worksheet command (Insert menu) 14, 27, 28
Worksheet functions 47
Worksheets
active 26
aligning data in cells 73
appending 28
calculating 60–62
color
in background 78
in cells 79
controlling usage of 31
data entry in 36, 48–57
constant values in 43–44
formulas in 44–62
multi-line 49
data types in 42
defining names in 54
deleting 33
description of 10
displaying items on 30
editing 85
formatting 63–84
Index
Worksheets (continued)
index number of 29
inserting 27–28
keyboard commands in 36
manipulating 26
naming 29
navigating in 38
number formatting 64–71
page breaks in 117
protecting 58
selecting 26
selecting all cells in 38
sorting data in 94
tabs, location of 21
using the mouse with 38
working with multiple selected 30
Writing workbooks 37
X
X axis 137
See also Category axis
X gap ratio 159, 168
XLS files, opening and saving 37
XY (scatter) charts 175–177
axes on 192
Y
Y axis 137
See also Value axis, Second Y axis
(Y) Axis Count text box 207
Z
Zero values, displaying 31
Zoom command (View Menu) 14
Zooming in and out
in printing 118
in viewing 14, 31
243